WO2022048593A1 - Method and device for channel measurement - Google Patents

Method and device for channel measurement Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022048593A1
WO2022048593A1 PCT/CN2021/116199 CN2021116199W WO2022048593A1 WO 2022048593 A1 WO2022048593 A1 WO 2022048593A1 CN 2021116199 W CN2021116199 W CN 2021116199W WO 2022048593 A1 WO2022048593 A1 WO 2022048593A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
delay
indication information
superposition
matrix
port
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/116199
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
范利
葛士斌
汪洁
袁一凌
种稚萌
毕晓艳
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022048593A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022048593A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B17/00Monitoring; Testing
    • H04B17/30Monitoring; Testing of propagation channels
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more particularly, to a method and a communication device for channel measurement.
  • the network device sends data to the terminal device, and it needs to rely on the channel state information (CSI) fed back by the terminal device to the network device.
  • CSI channel state information
  • uplink and downlink physical channels have partial reciprocity, such as reciprocity of multipath angle and reciprocity of time delay. Therefore, the CSI acquisition scheme can be designed based on partial reciprocity.
  • the uplink channel information can be used to estimate part of the prior information, including the angle and delay information of the uplink channel, and then the network device loads the obtained angle or delay on the downlink pilot, and notifies the terminal device to go to the Measure and feed back the supplementary information that network devices need to obtain. Finally, the network device reconstructs the downlink channel or precoding according to the information measured by the uplink pilot and the supplementary information fed back by the terminal device.
  • CSI-RS channel state information-reference signals
  • the present application provides a channel measurement method and a communication device, so as to reduce the influence of time delay deviation caused by uplink and downlink timing errors when performing channel estimation based on the idea of partial reciprocity, and at the same time reduce the interference between multi-user CSI-RS , improve the CSI-RS multiplexing rate and reduce the CSI-RS overhead.
  • a method for channel measurement may be executed by a first apparatus, and the first apparatus may be a terminal device, or may also be executed by a chip, a chip system or a circuit configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: receiving a precoding reference signal, where the precoding reference signal corresponds to one or more ports; and performing channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and a terminal-specific first delay to obtain each of the ports corresponding superposition coefficient; and send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficient.
  • the method further includes receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a second delay specific to the terminal device. It can be understood that the specific first delay of the terminal device can be obtained according to the second delay indicated by the network side.
  • the method further includes sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay.
  • the terminal side can indicate the first delay specific to the terminal device to the network side, so as to realize the alignment of the network side and the terminal side when the first delay is determined by the terminal side.
  • the method further includes sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a port selection matrix of the port.
  • a method for channel measurement is provided.
  • the method may be executed by a second apparatus, which may be a network device, or may also be executed by a chip, a chip system, or a circuit configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method may include: generating a precoding reference signal, where the precoding reference signal corresponds to one or more ports; sending the precoding reference signal; and receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate each of the The superposition coefficient corresponding to the port, where the superposition coefficient is associated with the first delay specific to the terminal device.
  • the method further includes sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a second delay specific to the terminal device. It can be understood that the specific first delay of the terminal device can be obtained according to the second delay indicated by the network side.
  • the method further includes receiving fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay.
  • the terminal side can indicate the first delay specific to the terminal device to the network side, so as to realize the alignment of the network side and the terminal side when the first delay is determined by the terminal side.
  • the method further includes receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a port selection matrix of the port.
  • the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports are used to determine the first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
  • W 1 is the port selection matrix of the port
  • W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports
  • W f is the frequency component matrix
  • Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation
  • Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  • the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports are used to determine the first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
  • W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, or W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports in the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports
  • W f is the frequency component matrix, represents the conjugate transpose of W f
  • Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation
  • Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  • the Q is:
  • K is the number of subbands
  • O is the number of columns of the oversampled discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook
  • O is associated with the first delay
  • K is the number of subbands
  • O is the number of columns of the first oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook
  • O' is the number of columns of the second oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook
  • O and O' are the same as The first time delay is associated.
  • the first oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook may be determined by a network device
  • the second oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook may be determined by a terminal device, that is, O is determined by a network device. OK, O' is determined by the terminal device.
  • the second indication information includes information of the second time delay, or the second indication information includes oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT The index of the codebook. It can be understood that the second indication information may directly or indirectly indicate the second delay.
  • the second delay is the first delay. It can be understood that the second delay indicated by the network side is the first delay, and the terminal side directly uses the delay indicated by the network side to perform channel measurement, which reduces computational complexity.
  • the first delay is a delay determined within a predetermined delay range corresponding to the second delay.
  • the second delay indicated by the network side is only for reference, and the terminal side needs to further determine the first delay, so as to avoid inaccurate channel measurement when there is a timing deviation between uplink and downlink, and improve the accuracy of channel measurement, and
  • the first delay is determined within a certain range based on the delay indicated by the reference network side, which reduces the amount of calculation and processing complexity.
  • the first delay is a delay obtained by estimating a delay adjustment amount. It can be understood that the network side may not perform delay offset, and the terminal side directly determines the first delay, which improves the accuracy of channel measurement.
  • the fourth indication information includes information about the first time delay, or the fourth indication information includes information for obtaining the first time delay Information about the delay adjustment amount of the delay. It can be understood that the fourth indication information may directly or indirectly indicate the first delay.
  • an apparatus for channel measurement may be a communication apparatus, configured to execute the communication method provided in the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • the apparatus may include a unit and/or a module for executing the communication method provided by the first aspect, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit.
  • the apparatus is a terminal device.
  • the communication unit may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface;
  • the processing unit may be a processor.
  • the apparatus is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device.
  • the communication unit may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. on the chip or the chip system;
  • the processing unit may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • an apparatus for channel measurement may be a communication apparatus for executing the communication method provided in the second aspect.
  • the apparatus may include a unit and/or a module for executing the communication method provided by the second aspect, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit.
  • the apparatus is a network device.
  • the communication unit may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface;
  • the processing unit may be a processor.
  • the apparatus is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device.
  • the communication unit may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. on the chip or the chip system;
  • the processing unit may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a processing apparatus including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory, so as to implement the communication method of the above-mentioned first aspect in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the processing device further includes a memory.
  • the processing device further includes a communication interface to which the processor is coupled, and the communication interface is used for inputting and/or outputting information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the processing apparatus is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the processing device is a chip or a system of chips.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip or a chip system.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the processing device is a chip or a chip system configured in the terminal device.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a processing apparatus including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the second aspect and the communication method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the processing device further includes a memory.
  • the processing device further includes a communication interface to which the processor is coupled, and the communication interface is used for inputting and/or outputting information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the processing apparatus is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the processing device is a chip or a system of chips.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip or a chip system.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the processing device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a communication device, the communication device enables the communication device to realize the first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect communication method in .
  • a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a communication device, enables the communication device to realize the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect communication method in .
  • a ninth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which when executed by a computer cause a communication apparatus to implement the communication method provided in the first aspect.
  • a tenth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which when executed by a computer cause a communication apparatus to implement the communication method provided by the second aspect.
  • a communication system including the aforementioned network device and terminal device.
  • FIG. 1a and 1b are schematic diagrams of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of uniformly shifting to delay 0 for all users
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a method for channel measurement according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a method for channel measurement according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a method for channel measurement according to yet another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • UMTS time division duplex
  • 5G mobile communication system new radio (NR)
  • NSA non-standalone
  • SA independent network
  • the technical solutions provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation mobile communication system.
  • the communication system may also be a PLMN network, a device-to-device (D2D) network, a machine-to-machine (M2M) network, an internet of things (IoT) network, or other networks.
  • the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles. Among them, the communication methods in the Internet of Vehicles system are collectively referred to as V2X (X stands for anything).
  • the V2X communication includes: vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I) communication ) communication, vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P) or vehicle-to-network (V2N) communication, etc.
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2I vehicle-to-infrastructure
  • V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian
  • V2N vehicle-to-network
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as: user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, terminal device, wireless communication device, user agent or user equipment, etc.
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, such as a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and the like.
  • some examples of terminals are: mobile phone (mobile phone), tablet computer, notebook computer, PDA, mobile internet device (MID), wearable device, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grids wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, cellular phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol , SIP) telephones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, automotive A device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a 5G network, or a terminal device in a future evolved public land mobile network (public land mobile network, PLMN), etc., are not
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for the intelligent design of daily wear and the development of wearable devices using wearable technology, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the IoT system.
  • IoT is an important part of the future development of information technology. Interconnection, the intelligent network of the interconnection of things and things.
  • the IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power saving of the terminal through, for example, a narrowband (narrow band) NB technology.
  • the terminal device may also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, and gas stations, and the main functions include collecting data (part of terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data of network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves. , to transmit uplink data to the network device.
  • sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, and gas stations
  • the main functions include collecting data (part of terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data of network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves. , to transmit uplink data to the network device.
  • the network device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with terminal devices, and the network device may be an evolved NodeB (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE system, or a cloud wireless access network
  • the network device can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and a network device in a future 5G network or a network in a future evolved PLMN network Devices, etc., are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the network device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device in a wireless network, for example, a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node that accesses a terminal to the wireless network.
  • RAN nodes are: next-generation base station gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), home base station, baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), or Access point (access point, AP) in WiFi system, etc.
  • a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • CU-UP nodes user plane CU nodes
  • the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • This hardware layer includes hardware such as central processing unit (CPU), memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also called main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed to provide the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute a program.
  • various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer readable device, carrier or medium.
  • computer readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), card, stick or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 100 suitable for this embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 111 shown in FIG. 1a, and the wireless communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 121 shown in FIG. 1a. to the terminal device 123.
  • Both the network device and the terminal device can be configured with multiple antennas, and the network device and the terminal device can communicate using the multi-antenna technology.
  • the network device when the network device communicates with the terminal device, the network device can manage one or more cells, and there can be an integer number of terminal devices in one cell.
  • the network device 111 and the terminal device 121 to the terminal device 123 form a single-cell communication system, and without loss of generality, the cell is denoted as cell #1.
  • the network device 111 may be a network device in cell #1, or in other words, the network device 111 may serve a terminal device (eg, terminal device 121) in cell #1.
  • a cell can be understood as an area within the coverage range of a wireless signal of a network device.
  • FIG. 1b is another schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 200 suitable for the embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system 200 includes a plurality of terminal devices, such as terminal device 124 to terminal device 126 in FIG. 1b. Communication between the terminal device 124 and the terminal device 126 can be performed directly. For example, terminal device 124 and terminal device 125 may transmit data to terminal device 126 individually or simultaneously.
  • FIG. 1 a and FIG. 1 b are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be applied to any communication system as long as there are at least two devices in the communication system, wherein one device needs to send a precoding reference signal; the other device receives the precoding reference signal and performs channel measurement And feedback channel state information.
  • Precoding technology When the channel state is known, the network device can process the signal to be sent with the help of a precoding matrix that matches the channel state, so that the precoded signal to be sent is adapted to the channel, thereby This reduces the complexity for the receiving device to eliminate the influence between channels. Therefore, the received signal quality (eg, signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.) is improved through the precoding process of the signal to be transmitted. Therefore, by using precoding technology, the transmitting device and multiple receiving devices can transmit on the same time-frequency resources, that is, multi-user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) is realized.
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the sending device may also perform precoding in other manners.
  • the channel information eg, but not limited to, the channel matrix
  • a preset precoding matrix or a weighting processing method is used to perform precoding and the like.
  • the specific content will not be repeated here.
  • the uplink and downlink channels transmit signals on different time domain resources on the same frequency domain resource. Within a relatively short time (eg, the coherence time of channel propagation), it can be considered that the channel fading experienced by the signals on the uplink and downlink channels is the same. This is the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels.
  • the network device can measure the uplink channel according to the uplink reference signal, such as the sounding reference signal (SRS), and can estimate the downlink channel according to the uplink channel, so that it can be determined for downlink transmission. the precoding matrix.
  • the uplink reference signal such as the sounding reference signal (SRS)
  • the uplink and downlink channels in frequency division duplexing (FDD) mode have partial reciprocity, for example, the reciprocity of angle and the reciprocity of delay, in other words, the delay and angle in FDD
  • the uplink and downlink channels in this mode are reciprocal. Therefore, angle and delay can also be called reciprocity parameters.
  • the multipath delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of the frequency domain channel.
  • Delay is the transmission time of wireless signals on different transmission paths, which is determined by distance and speed, and has nothing to do with the frequency domain of wireless signals.
  • the angle may refer to the angle of arrival (AOA) at which the signal reaches the receiving antenna via the wireless channel, or may refer to the angle of departure (AOD) of the signal transmitted through the transmitting antenna.
  • AOA angle of arrival
  • AOD angle of departure
  • the angle may refer to the arrival angle of the uplink signal reaching the network device, or may refer to the departure angle of the network device transmitting the downlink signal.
  • the arrival angle of the uplink reference signal and the departure angle of the downlink reference signal can be considered to be the same, or reciprocal. Therefore, the angle of the uplink and downlink channels in the FDD mode is reciprocal.
  • Reference signal reference signal, RS
  • RS reference signal
  • the reference signal may be a reference signal used for channel measurement.
  • the reference signal may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) used for downlink channel measurement, or may be a sounding reference signal (Sounding reference signal, SRS) used for uplink channel measurement.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the precoding reference signal may be a reference signal obtained by precoding the reference signal.
  • the precoding may specifically include beamforming (beamforming) and/or phase rotation.
  • the beamforming can be implemented by, for example, precoding the downlink reference signal based on one or more angle vectors
  • the phase rotation can be implemented by, for example, precoding the downlink reference signal with one or more delay vectors.
  • a reference signal obtained by precoding such as beamforming and/or phase rotation
  • a reference signal without precoding is referred to as a reference signal for short .
  • precoding the downlink reference signal based on one or more angle vectors may also be referred to as loading one or more angle vectors onto the downlink reference signal to implement beamforming.
  • Precoding the downlink reference signal based on one or more delay vectors may also be referred to as loading one or more delay vectors onto the downlink reference signal to implement phase rotation.
  • Precoding the downlink reference signal based on one or more delay vectors may also be referred to as loading one or more relative delay vectors onto the downlink reference signal to implement phase rotation.
  • the relative time delay will be specifically described in the following embodiments.
  • a port may refer to a reference signal transmission port or a transmit antenna port.
  • the reference signal of each port may be an unprecoded reference signal, or a reference signal based on at least one delay vector.
  • the precoding reference signal obtained by precoding; the port may also refer to the reference signal port after beamforming, for example, the reference signal corresponding to each port may be the precoding obtained by precoding the reference signal based on an angle vector.
  • the reference signal may also be a precoded reference signal obtained by precoding the reference signal based on an angle vector and a delay vector.
  • the signal of each port can be transmitted through one or more resource blocks (RBs).
  • RBs resource blocks
  • the transmit antenna port may refer to an actual independent transmit unit (transceiver unit, TxRU). It can be understood that if spatial domain precoding is performed on the reference signal, the number of ports may refer to the number of reference signal ports, and the number of reference signal ports may be smaller than the number of transmit antenna ports.
  • TxRU transmit unit
  • transmit antenna ports when referring to transmit antenna ports, it may refer to the number of ports that are not subjected to spatial precoding. That is, it is the actual number of independent transmission units.
  • a port when referring to a port, in different embodiments, it may refer to a transmit antenna port or a reference signal port. The specific meaning expressed by the port can be determined according to the specific embodiment.
  • Angle vector It can be understood as a precoding vector used for beamforming the reference signal. Through beamforming, the transmitted reference signal can have a certain spatial directivity. Therefore, the process of precoding the reference signal based on the angle vector can also be regarded as a process of spatial domain (or simply, spatial domain) precoding.
  • the number of ports of the precoded reference signal obtained by precoding the reference signal based on one or more angle vectors is the same as the number of angle vectors.
  • the angle vector is taken from an (oversampled) Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) matrix.
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • the reference signal loaded with the angle vector can be transmitted to the terminal device through the downlink channel, so the channel measured by the terminal device according to the received precoding reference signal is equivalent to the channel loaded with the angle vector.
  • angle vector is a form proposed in this application for representing the angle.
  • the angle vector is named only for convenience in distinguishing it from the time delay, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other names in future agreements to represent the same or similar meanings.
  • Frequency domain unit a unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different granularity of frequency domain resources.
  • the frequency domain unit may include, but is not limited to, a subband (subband), a resource block (RB), a resource block group (RBG), a precoding resource block group (PRG), etc. .
  • the network device may determine a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on feedback from the terminal device.
  • Terminal device-specific (can be called UE-specific) delay user-specific delay, for the terminal device, the network device shifts the delay observed by each port on the terminal side to the delay (in the delay It can be embodied as a certain delay tap in the domain, the delay is specific to the terminal equipment, the delay of different terminal equipment can be different or the same), which is equivalent to the specific delay component to which the equivalent channel of the terminal equipment is moved , is the offset to which the path delay is offset, the path delay is the centering delay of the angle delay corresponding to a certain path (it can be a relative delay or an absolute delay), and the angle delay is the Can be a combination of an angle vector and a delay vector.
  • Each angle-delay pair may include an angle vector and a delay vector.
  • each angle-delay pair can be uniquely determined by an angle vector and a delay vector.
  • the angle-delay pair can be understood as a representation of the space-frequency basic unit determined by an angle vector and a time-delay vector, but it is not necessarily the only representation. For example, it can also be expressed as a space-frequency component matrix, a space-frequency component vector, and the like.
  • a space-frequency component matrix can be determined by an angle-delay pair.
  • a space-frequency component matrix can be uniquely determined by an angle vector and a delay vector.
  • a space-frequency component matrix and an angle-delay pair can be converted to each other.
  • the space-frequency matrix may be an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix.
  • Delay offset The delay offset mentioned in this application is that the network side offsets the original channel delay (can be recorded as ⁇ ) to the destination delay (can be recorded as ⁇ ' or ⁇ * ), and also That is, after performing the delay offset, the equivalent channel delay observed by the terminal side is ⁇ ' or ⁇ * .
  • Reference signal resources can be used to configure the transmission properties of the reference signal, such as time-frequency resource location, port mapping relationship, power factor, and scrambling code, etc. For details, please refer to the prior art.
  • the transmitting end device may transmit the reference signal based on the reference signal resource, and the receiving end device may receive the reference signal based on the reference signal resource.
  • One reference signal resource may include one or more RBs.
  • the reference signal resource may be, for example, a CSI-RS resource.
  • FDD downlink channel reconstruction also known as CSI acquisition based on FDD partial reciprocity
  • the CSI-based downlink channel reconstruction method of the FDD system includes the following steps:
  • Step 1 the network device receives the SRS sent by the terminal device, and uses the uplink SRS to estimate the information (for example, direction angle, time delay, etc.) that the uplink and downlink have reciprocity;
  • Step 2 The network device sends the downlink reference signal to the terminal device. Specifically, the network device loads the obtained uplink and downlink reciprocity information (which may include the offset of the delay component) on the downlink reference signal, and notifies the terminal The device measures and feeds back the supplementary information that the network device needs to obtain;
  • Step 3 The terminal device re-estimates and feeds back supplementary information by using the downlink reference signal (for example, it may be the full-band complex amplitude corresponding to each port, that is, the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port);
  • the downlink reference signal for example, it may be the full-band complex amplitude corresponding to each port, that is, the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port;
  • Step 4 The network device uses the information obtained in the first and third steps to reconstruct the downlink channel, that is, according to the obtained information and the predetermined codebook structure, determine a precoding matrix that matches the channel state to process the signal to be sent, The precoded signal to be sent is adapted to the channel.
  • Subband It can also be called a subcarrier, which is used to carry signals, occupies a bandwidth in the frequency domain, and can be embodied as a resource element (RE).
  • the subbands mentioned in this application are subbands used to transmit CSI-RS.
  • the superposition coefficient corresponding to the port it can also be called the full-band complex amplitude corresponding to the port, and the superposition coefficient corresponding to the transmitting port. In a specific case, the superposition coefficient corresponding to the port can be the complex amplitude of the path.
  • the projection coefficient on the precoding vector is the superposition coefficient corresponding to the CSI-RS port.
  • the UE feeds back the superposition coefficient corresponding to each transmission port to the network device.
  • the network device reconstructs the downlink channel by using the direction angle and time delay of each path estimated in the uplink and the superposition coefficient of each transmission port re-evaluated and fed back by the UE.
  • for indicating may include both for direct indication and for indirect indication.
  • the indication information may directly indicate A or indirectly indicate A, but it does not mean that A must be carried in the indication information.
  • the information indicated by the indication information is called the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or the information to be indicated. Indicating the index of information, etc.
  • the information to be indicated may also be indirectly indicated by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance.
  • the indication of specific information can also be implemented by means of a pre-agreed (for example, a protocol stipulated) arrangement order of various information, so as to reduce the indication overhead to a certain extent.
  • the information to be indicated may be sent together as a whole, or may be divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the transmission periods and/or transmission timings of these sub-information may be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be predefined, for example, predefined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device.
  • the configuration information may include, for example, but not limited to, one or a combination of at least two of radio resource control signaling, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer signaling, and physical layer signaling.
  • the radio resource control signaling such as packet radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling; MAC layer signaling, for example, includes MAC control element (control element, CE); physical layer signaling, for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control information). information, DCI).
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC layer signaling for example, includes MAC control element (control element, CE)
  • CE control element
  • physical layer signaling for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control information). information, DCI).
  • the first, the second, and various numeral numbers are only for the convenience of description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first and the second may be distinguished as types in the embodiments of the present application, and not as object contents.
  • the "storage” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to storage in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be set separately, or may be integrated in an encoder or a decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partially provided separately and partially integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device.
  • the type of memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • the "protocols" involved in the embodiments of this application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, such as LTE protocols, NR protocols, WLAN protocols, and related protocols in other communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • And/or which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an “or” relationship.
  • At least one item(s) below” or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s).
  • At least one (a) of a, b and c can represent: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , b and c.
  • a, b and c can be single or multiple respectively.
  • the DFT involved in the embodiments of the present application may be oversampling or may not be oversampling. Therefore, hereinafter, "(oversampling) discrete Fourier transform DFT” or “(oversampling) DFT” is uniformly used to indicate that it can be either an oversampling DFT or a DFT without oversampling.
  • the uplink channel and the downlink channel use the same bandwidth, the uplink channel and the downlink channel are reciprocal, and the network device side can use the reciprocity of the uplink channel and the downlink channel to obtain the CSI of the downlink channel through the uplink channel. Further, signal precoding is performed.
  • the network device side can use the partial reciprocity of FDD to send reciprocal information to the pilot, and the terminal device only needs to feed back the information without reciprocity (such as information other than angle and delay) .
  • the complete CSI of the downlink channel can be acquired by combining the reciprocal information obtained by the network device through the uplink channel and the non-reciprocal information fed back by the terminal device.
  • the network device needs to use the uplink channel information to estimate part of the prior information, including the angle and delay information of the uplink channel.
  • the network equipment projects on a certain spatial base (S) ensemble or a frequency domain base (F) ensemble to obtain the corresponding optimal angle and delay estimates.
  • H UL represents the space-frequency matrix obtained by the uplink channel measurement.
  • S corresponds to airspace information, and physically corresponds to the arrival angle/departure angle of the network device.
  • S can represent a matrix constructed from one or more angle vectors.
  • F corresponds to frequency domain information, and physically corresponds to the multipath delay of the multipath signal reaching the network device.
  • F can represent a matrix constructed from one or more delay vectors.
  • C may represent weighting coefficients corresponding to an angle vector and a delay vector.
  • C UL represents the coefficient matrix corresponding to the uplink channel.
  • the superscript H represents the conjugate transpose, for example, F H represents the conjugate transpose of the matrix (or vector) F.
  • the network device loads the angle-delay pair on the pilot, and the terminal device performs channel measurement according to the received pilot signal to obtain the superposition coefficient of the corresponding angle-delay pair.
  • the network device When the network device loads the angle-delay pair on the pilot, it can do a delay offset, but if it is aimed at multiple users, it defaults to a unified delay offset, that is, the default equivalent channels of different UEs are uniformly offset to a certain delay. For example, as shown in Figure 2, the user-specific delay is not determined for different users, but is uniformly shifted to the position where the delay tap is 0 in the delay domain for all users.
  • the interference between multi-user channel state information-reference signals (CSI-RS) reduces the CSI-RS multiplexing rate and the problems of excessive CSI-RS overhead.
  • CSI-RS channel state information-reference signals
  • the present application proposes a method, which can reduce the influence of the delay deviation caused by the uplink and downlink timing errors, and reduce the multi-user CSI-RS by using the specific delay for each UE, that is, the UE-specific first delay. Interference, improve CSI-RS multiplexing rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 300 for channel measurement provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 300 may include the following steps.
  • the terminal device receives a precoding reference signal.
  • the network device generates the precoding reference signal, and sends the precoding reference signal
  • the precoding reference signal corresponds to one or more ports
  • the port may be regarded as the port for sending the precoding reference signal.
  • the network device may precode the downlink reference signal based on information with reciprocity, and the information with reciprocity may be determined based on uplink channel measurement. For example, since the angle and the delay are reciprocal in the uplink and downlink channels, the network device may precode the downlink reference signal based on the angle vector and/or the delay vector determined based on the uplink channel measurement, so that the terminal device can use the precoded reference signal to precode the downlink reference signal. signal for channel estimation.
  • the network device may precode the downlink reference signal based on the angle vector determined based on the uplink channel measurement.
  • each angle may be represented by an angle vector.
  • Each delay can be characterized by a delay vector. Therefore, in this embodiment of the present application, an angle vector may represent an angle, and a delay vector may represent a delay.
  • delay and delay vector are sometimes used interchangeably, and angle and angle vector are sometimes used interchangeably.
  • the T delay vectors may be determined based on uplink channel measurements. Alternatively, the T delay vectors may not be determined based on uplink channel measurements. For example, the T delay vectors may be predefined, as defined by a protocol; or, the T delay vectors may be statistically determined based on one or more previous downlink channel measurements. The present application does not limit the acquisition manner of the T delay vectors.
  • the number of delay vectors corresponding to one angle vector is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • T delay vectors correspond to each of the F angle vectors.
  • any two angle vectors among the F angle vectors may correspond to the same T delay vectors.
  • one or more delay vectors among the T delay vectors may correspond to one angle vector among the F angle vectors.
  • delay vectors corresponding to at least two angle vectors are different.
  • F angle vectors as an example for illustration. Among them, F ⁇ 1, and F is an integer.
  • the precoding reference signal is obtained by precoding the reference signal based on the F angle vectors.
  • the network device may precode a reference signal, such as a CSI-RS, based on each of the predetermined F angle vectors, to obtain precoded reference signals corresponding to the F ports.
  • the precoding reference signal of each port may be obtained by precoding based on one angle vector among the F angle vectors.
  • the F angle vectors can be determined based on the uplink channel measurement.
  • the network device may determine F stronger angles according to the uplink channel matrix obtained by pre-estimation.
  • the F angles can be characterized by F angle vectors.
  • the F angle vectors may, for example, be taken from a predefined set of angle vectors.
  • each angle vector in the set of angle vectors is taken from an (oversampled) DFT matrix.
  • each angle vector in the angle vector set is a steering vector.
  • the network device may determine the F angle vectors by using, for example, a joint angle and delay estimation (joint angle and delay estimation, JADE) algorithm in the prior art.
  • the estimation algorithm can be, for example, a multiple signal classification algorithm (multiple signal classification algorithm, MUSIC), a Bartlett algorithm or a rotation invariant subspace algorithm (estimation of signal parameters via rotation invariant technique algorithm, ESPRIT), etc.
  • the network device may also determine the F angle vectors by performing (oversampling) DFT on the space-frequency matrix determined based on the uplink channel measurements.
  • the present application does not limit the specific method for the network device to determine the F angle vectors.
  • the F angle vectors are not necessarily determined based on uplink channel measurements.
  • the F angle vectors may be predefined, as defined in a protocol; or, the F angle vectors may be statistically determined based on results fed back by one or more previous downlink channel measurements.
  • the present application does not limit the manner of determining the F angle vectors.
  • the terminal device performs channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and the first time delay specific to the terminal device, and obtains a superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports.
  • the specific first delay of the terminal equipment may be indicated to the terminal equipment by the network equipment, may be determined by the terminal equipment within a predetermined delay range based on the indication of the network equipment, or may be determined by the terminal equipment through the estimation of the delay adjustment amount. Obtained, optionally, can be obtained by the terminal equipment in conjunction with each port (it can be said to be in conjunction with all ports) or in conjunction with some ports to estimate the delay adjustment amount. No matter how it is obtained, the first delay is a delay specific to the terminal device, or can also be said to be a delay dedicated to the terminal device. It should be understood that "the superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports" includes all superposition coefficients or part of the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the ports.
  • all the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the ports have a total of 32 (8 times 4), and the "superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports" can be It is all the 32 superposition coefficients, and it can also be a part of the superposition coefficients (such as the superposition coefficients selected by the terminal device according to the preset rules), for example, the same number of superposition coefficients are selected for each port, or for each port.
  • the port selects the superposition coefficients according to the preset rules. For port 1, there are 3 superposition coefficients that meet the predetermined conditions. For port 2, there are 4 superposition coefficients that meet the predetermined conditions. For port 3, there are 2 superposition coefficients that meet the predetermined conditions.
  • the superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports is a partial superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports, it is not excluded that the terminal device also obtained all the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the ports, and it should be understood that "obtain" in 320 For the feedback information of the terminal device (the content indicated by the first indication information below), it is not excluded to obtain other information.
  • the terminal device may be directly based on the first delay, or may be indirectly based on the first delay, for example, based on information associated with the first delay (through the The associated information can be obtained from the first delay), for example, the (oversampled) DFT frequency-domain vector corresponding to the first delay (eg, w q and/or w′ q in the following).
  • the terminal device sends the first indication information.
  • the corresponding network device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficient.
  • the first indication information may directly carry the superposition coefficient, or may carry a parameter associated with the superposition coefficient, or a deformation form of the superposition coefficient, etc.
  • the first indication information can directly or indirectly indicate the the superposition factor. It can be understood that the first indication information may be delivered through one or more signalings, which is not limited in this application.
  • the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports are used to determine the first codebook. It should be understood that all the descriptions referring to "each port” in this application are intended to emphasize that each port in all ports must be considered, “each port” should be considered.
  • the superposition coefficient corresponding to the port” means that the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is considered in all ports, that is, the collection of superposition coefficients corresponding to each port.
  • the superposition coefficients corresponding to each port are used to determine the first codebook can be understood as “the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of all the ports are used to determine the first codebook together"; for example, there are P ports, and each port corresponds to The superposition coefficients (which can be all the superposition coefficients corresponding to each port, or the corresponding partial superposition coefficients) are L', then there are PL' superposition coefficients used to determine the first codebook, where P, L ' is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and PL' means P multiplied by L'.
  • W 1 is the port selection matrix of the port
  • W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports (denoted as case 1), or W 2 can be the superposition coefficient of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports matrix (denoted as case 2)
  • W f is the frequency component matrix (also known as frequency domain basis vector matrix)
  • Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation
  • Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  • the codebook structure will be described respectively according to the channel measurement in different acquisition modes of the first delay.
  • the above - mentioned port selection matrix W1 can be any type of port selection matrix (including existing port selection matrix types and possible future port selection matrix types, which is not limited in this application), and can be used to indicate the port selection matrix. information.
  • the dimension of W 1 can be P*2L 0
  • W 1 is used to select 2L 0 ports from P CSI-RS ports
  • L 0 means CSI-RS selected in one polarization direction
  • the number of ports (spatial vector), where P means the number of ports of the CSI-RS.
  • the values of L 0 and P may be configured by the network side through one or more of RCC, MAC CE, and DCI signaling, or may be agreed by the protocol.
  • W1 can also be interpreted from the perspective of port groups to realize the selection of corresponding ports.
  • the dimension of W1 can be expressed as represents the number of CSI-RS port groups in one polarization direction, Indicates the number of CSI-RS port groups selected for one polarization direction.
  • each column of elements in W 1 represents a port group, and an element with a value of 1 indicates that the corresponding CSI-RS port is selected. According to this W 1 indicates that among the two CSI-RS port groups, select the first The first CSI-RS port in one group, and the third CSI-RS port in the second group.
  • each row of elements in W 1 represents a port group, and the element with a value of 1 indicates that the corresponding CSI-RS port group is selected. According to the W 1 , it indicates that among the four CSI-RS port groups, Select the first CSI-RS port group, and the third CSI-RS port group.
  • W f can also be any type of frequency domain component matrix (including existing frequency domain component matrix types and possible future frequency domain component matrix types, which is not limited in this application), and W f can include one or more A specific column vector (also referred to as a basis vector), for a column vector including a column vector, the length of the column vector can be N f ⁇ 1, where N f is the number of frequency units, which can be equal to the number of RBs in the CSI-RS transmission bandwidth Or the number of subbands, or it may be a function of the number of RBs or subbands, or it may be notified by the network side or a protocol agreement.
  • the network side can restrict W f to be a specific K column of the (oversampling) DFT through signaling, where the K column represents K specific frequency component positions.
  • W 1 may not be available, and the selected ports may be indicated by the terminal device to the network device in other forms, such as the form of a bitmap, so the first codebook can satisfy in, and Q H refer to the above explanation
  • W 2 can be the same as the above explanation, and is still the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports (case 1), that is, combined with the bitmap indication and W 2 , we can know which ports are selected from all ports port, and the superposition coefficient corresponding to the selected port; or W 2 can be the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficient corresponding to the selected port (case 2), that is, combined with the bitmap indication and W 2 , it can be known that all ports have selected which ports, and the superposition factor corresponding to the selected port.
  • W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, and it only illustrates the structure size of W 2 (or the number of matrix elements in W 2 ) considering each port (also That is to say, the number of ports of all ports is considered), for example, the number of lines of W 2 is the number of ports of all ports. But this does not mean that the information content of W 2 (the content indicated by the matrix elements in W 2 ) includes the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port in all ports. For example, if some ports are not selected, the corresponding ones in W 2 The value on the matrix element may be 0, and only the selected port has its corresponding superposition coefficient on the corresponding matrix element in W2.
  • W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports, but it just shows that the structure size of W 2 (or the number of matrix elements in W 2 ) is taken into consideration of the selected ports (also That is to say, the port number of the selected port is considered), for example, the number of lines of W 2 is the port number of the selected port. It can be seen that the size of the matrix may be smaller in case 2 than in case 1.
  • the terminal device sends third indication information.
  • Step 340 is an optional step, and the corresponding network device receives third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the port selection matrix W 1 .
  • the indication to the port selection matrix W1 may be a direct indication or an indirect indication.
  • the third indication information and the first indication information may be sent through one message or separately sent through different messages.
  • the channel measurement can be performed using the specific time delay for each UE, which can reduce the influence of the time delay deviation caused by the uplink and downlink timing errors, reduce the interference between multi-user CSI-RS, and improve the CSI-RS multiplexing. rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 400 for channel measurement provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the difference between this embodiment and the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 is that the method for obtaining the first delay in this embodiment is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, and the method 400 may include the following steps.
  • the terminal device receives a precoding reference signal.
  • 410 is similar to the above-mentioned 310, and reference is made to the description of 310, and details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information.
  • the network device generates the second indication information, and sends the second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second delay specific to the terminal device.
  • the second delay is the first delay.
  • the second indication information may directly carry the second delay, or may carry parameters associated with the second delay, or be a variant of the second delay, etc.
  • the The second indication information can directly or indirectly indicate the second delay. It can be understood that the second indication information may be issued through one or more pieces of signaling, which is not limited in this application. It should be understood that 410 and 420 are not necessarily in order.
  • the terminal device determines the specific first delay of the terminal device according to the second indication information, and performs channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and the final first delay, and obtains the corresponding port corresponding to each port. the superposition factor.
  • the direct or indirect indication means for the second indication information may specifically be:
  • the second indication information directly indicates the second delay (denoted as ⁇ * )
  • ⁇ * here is the quantized delay information.
  • the network device estimates the angular delay information ( ⁇ i , ⁇ i ) for the i-th path (or the i-th port) from the uplink channel estimation, where ⁇ i is the angle information, and ⁇ i is the delay information.
  • the number of subbands is K (that is, the number of subbands used to transmit CSI-RS number of bands), the number of transmitting antennas on the network device side is M (the UE may not need to perceive the M), the number of receiving antennas on the UE side is N, the number of ports is P, the K, M, N, and P are all integers, and K and P can be indicated to the UE by the network device, and the equivalent channel on the nth (1 ⁇ n ⁇ N) UE antenna can be expressed as:
  • the UE performs channel estimation based on a specific delay ⁇ * to obtain an equivalent channel, denoted as (in is the equivalent channel obtained without considering ⁇ * ):
  • Q is a diagonal matrix used for channel estimation using ⁇ * , which satisfies the following form:
  • Represents a field of complex numbers with K rows and K columns, and the elements on the diagonal of this diagonal matrix are f k represents the frequency of the k-th subband, k 1, 2, ..., K, where K is the number of subbands.
  • the UE calculates the PL superposition coefficients corresponding to the nth receiving antenna of the UE as follows (PL represents P multiplied by L, and the PL superposition coefficients are the sum of the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the P ports, where the superposition corresponding to each port is The coefficients can be L):
  • vec(A) means to expand the matrix A into a column vector
  • L is the number of columns of the frequency domain component matrix W f
  • W f can be indicated to the UE by the network device, or by the protocol Predefined.
  • the cn is the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port corresponding to the nth receiving antenna of the UE.
  • the superposition coefficient cn corresponding to each port for the nth receiving antenna of the UE is obtained.
  • Means (2) the second indication information indirectly indicates the second delay by indicating other information
  • the network device sends signaling to instruct the UE to feed back the path coefficients (optionally, it can indicate (oversampling) the value of the DFT codebook) on the specific frequency domain component w q (related to the ⁇ * , which is equivalent to the indirect indication ⁇ * ).
  • the index (index) is equivalent to indicating the related information of 0 and o.
  • Represents a complex number field with K rows and 1 column, o 0,1,...,O-1, O is the number of columns of the (oversampling) DFT codebook, and the column vector elements of w q are K is the number of subbands; the network device can deliver the relevant information of o and 0 to the UE.
  • the network equipment obtains the angle delay information ( ⁇ i , ⁇ i ) from the uplink channel estimation and loads it on the pilot frequency, and performs pre-offset, where is the conjugate of w q .
  • w q (k) represents the k-th element of w q
  • the UE calculates the PL superposition coefficients corresponding to the nth receiving antenna of the UE as follows (PL represents P multiplied by L, and the PL superposition coefficients are the sum of the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the P ports, where the superposition corresponding to each port is The coefficients can be L):
  • vec(A) means to expand the matrix A into a column vector
  • L is the number of columns of the frequency domain component matrix W f
  • W f can be indicated to the UE by the network device, or by the protocol Predefined.
  • the cn is the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port corresponding to the nth receiving antenna of the UE.
  • the superposition coefficient cn corresponding to each port for the nth receiving antenna of the UE is obtained.
  • the terminal device sends the first indication information.
  • the network device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports.
  • 440 is similar to 330. For the same content, reference may be made to the description of 330, and details are not repeated here.
  • the UE can report the feedback coefficients according to the instructions of the network device or select some coefficients from P ⁇ L coefficients for reporting.
  • P ⁇ L coefficients for reporting.
  • P' is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to PL, that is to say, all or part of the superposition coefficients corresponding to each port can be fed back, which is hereby explained. .
  • the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports are used to determine the first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies:
  • the above formula satisfied by the first codebook is from the perspective of one receiving antenna, considering the collection of superposition coefficients corresponding to each port in all ports corresponding to one receiving antenna, there is one W 2 ;
  • the root receive antenna, W2 has N or can be an equivalent variant of N W2 .
  • the dimension of W 1 may be P*2L 0 , W 1 is used to select 2L 0 ports from the P CSI-RS ports, and L 0 means a polar is the number of CSI-RS ports (spatial vector) selected in the direction of LD, and the meaning of P is the number of CSI-RS ports.
  • W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, or W 2 may be the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports, and W f is the frequency component matrix (also referred to as the frequency domain basis vector matrix ), W f can include one or more specific column vectors (also called basis vectors), the network side can restrict W f to be a specific K column of DFT or oversampling DFT through signaling, and K column represents K specific frequency component location.
  • Q is a diagonal matrix of the following form (see above for a detailed explanation, and will not be repeated here):
  • Q is a diagonal matrix of the following form (see above for a detailed explanation, and will not be repeated here):
  • the terminal device sends third indication information.
  • Step 450 is an optional step, and the corresponding network device receives the third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the port selection matrix W 1 .
  • the indication to the port selection matrix W1 may be a direct indication or an indirect indication.
  • the third indication information and the first indication information may be sent through one message or separately sent through different messages.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 500 for channel measurement provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the difference between this embodiment and the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 is that the method for obtaining the first delay in this embodiment is obtained by the UE performing delay estimation (the network device may impose a delay offset, or it may not impose a delay offset). time delay offset), the method 500 may include the following steps.
  • the terminal device receives a precoding reference signal.
  • 510 is similar to the above-mentioned 310 and 410. Refer to the description of 310 and 410, and details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information.
  • the UE may receive the second indication information for indicating the second delay specific to the terminal device.
  • the second delay is not the first delay
  • the second delay is a specific delay offset by the network device for the UE
  • the first delay is a requirement finally determined by the UE A specific delay used for channel measurement (ie, channel estimation).
  • the second delay may not be specific to the UE.
  • the second indication information may directly carry the second delay, or may carry parameters associated with the second delay, or be a variant of the second delay, etc.
  • the The second indication information can directly or indirectly indicate the second delay. It can be understood that the second indication information may be issued through one or more pieces of signaling, which is not limited in this application. It should be understood that 510 and 520 are not necessarily in order.
  • the terminal device performs channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and the first time delay specific to the terminal device, and obtains a superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports.
  • the first delay is obtained by the UE performing delay estimation, and may include:
  • Mode 1 The UE estimates the delay within a predetermined delay range corresponding to the second delay according to the indication of the second indication information, and the predetermined delay range may be a certain delay value range agreed in the protocol , the UE may perform delay estimation within a predetermined delay range based on the indication of the network device and take the second delay as a reference to obtain the first delay.
  • the parts with the same content as the means (1) in 430 will not be repeated in this embodiment.
  • the equivalent channel is obtained, that is, the in is the equivalent channel obtained without considering ⁇ * , is the diagonal matrix used for channel estimation using ⁇ * , and is a diagonal matrix of the form:
  • the UE Due to the uplink and downlink delay timing deviation, the UE cannot obtain the correct delay tap after channel estimation based on the delay ⁇ * . Therefore, it is necessary to additionally perform channel estimation based on the uplink and downlink timing deviation to obtain the equivalent channel.
  • the uplink and downlink timing deviation can be determined by the UE side. is calculated and denoted as ⁇ TA , then the equivalent channel after channel estimation based on the uplink and downlink timing offset is denoted as
  • Q TA is a diagonal matrix used for channel estimation using ⁇ TA , which satisfies the following form
  • the above two steps can be combined into one step, that is, channel estimation is performed based on ⁇ * and ⁇ TA at the same time, that is,
  • the UE calculates the P ⁇ L coefficients corresponding to the nth UE antenna as follows:
  • the diagonal matrix for channel estimation using w q satisfies the following form, which is determined by the relevant information of o and o indicated by the network device:
  • the (oversampled) DFT frequency domain vector is w′ q
  • the related information of the index (index) of the corresponding (oversampled) DFT codebook is O′ and o′.
  • the diagonal matrix for channel estimation using w' q satisfies the following form, where O' and o' are determined by the UE:
  • Mode 2 The network device does not send the second indication information, or even if the network device does not perform delay offset, the UE performs delay adjustment amount estimation to obtain the first delay (which is also equivalent to obtaining the corresponding Sampling) DFT frequency domain vector), optionally, the UE can perform delay adjustment amount estimation in conjunction with each port (it can be said to combine all ports) or in conjunction with some ports.
  • mode 2 is equivalent to performing channel estimation directly based on ( ⁇ * + ⁇ TA ), or it can be said that UE directly performs channel estimation based on a specific ⁇ ′ It is estimated that ⁇ ' is the first time delay specific to the terminal device, and ⁇ ' is equivalent to ( ⁇ * + ⁇ TA ).
  • the UE does not obtain w q and w' q respectively in the second way, so the second way is equivalent to directly performing channel estimation based on w q and w' q , or it can be said that the UE directly based on the specific perform channel estimation, Equivalent to w q and w′ q ,
  • the related information of the index of the corresponding (oversampled) DFT codebook is o * and O * , which are determined by the UE.
  • the terminal device sends the first indication information.
  • the corresponding network device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficient.
  • the codebook structure Q in is a diagonal matrix of the following form for means (1) in way one:
  • f k represents the frequency of the kth subband
  • k 1, 2,..., K
  • K is the number of subbands
  • ( ⁇ * + ⁇ TA ) is the first delay
  • ⁇ * is the uplink delay
  • ⁇ TA is the uplink and downlink timing deviation.
  • f k represents the frequency of the k-th subband
  • k 1, 2, . . . , K
  • K is the number of subbands.
  • Q is a diagonal matrix of the following form:
  • the number of columns of , O' is the number of columns of the second (oversampled) DFT codebook, and O and O' are associated with the first delay.
  • the first (oversampling) DFT codebook may be determined by the network device
  • the second (oversampling) DFT codebook may be determined by the terminal device, that is, O is determined by the network device, and O' is determined by the UE Sure.
  • the terminal device sends third indication information.
  • Step 550 is an optional step, and the corresponding network device receives third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the port selection matrix W 1 .
  • the indication to the port selection matrix W1 may be a direct indication or an indirect indication.
  • the terminal device sends fourth indication information.
  • Step 560 is an optional step, and the corresponding network device receives fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay.
  • the fourth indication information may directly indicate or indirectly indicate the first delay.
  • the fourth indication information includes information of the first delay (eg, ⁇ * + ⁇ TA , ⁇ '), or the fourth indication information includes a delay adjustment amount (eg, ⁇ TA ) for obtaining the first delay, or includes other information (eg o/O, o'/O', etc.) to to instruct.
  • the third indication information, the fourth indication information and the first indication information may be sent through one message or sent through different messages respectively.
  • the UE performs delay estimation to determine the channel measurement for the specific delay of the UE, which can reduce the influence of the uplink and downlink timing errors caused by the delay deviation, and at the same time reduce the Interference between multi-user CSI-RS, improve CSI-RS multiplexing rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
  • the first indication information, the third indication information, and the fourth indication information can be sent through the same signaling or through different signaling, and this application does not carry out this. limit.
  • the inter-user interference can be reduced when multiple users perform CSI-RS multiplexing in the delay domain, and two users are taken as an example below.
  • the angle domain information is ignored in this example, and it is assumed that both the network device and the UE are configured with one antenna, there are K subbands in the frequency domain, each user has only one path, and the precoding reference signal corresponds to only one port. , the user's channel looks like this:
  • ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are the superposition coefficients corresponding to users 1 and 2 respectively (that is, the superposition coefficient corresponding to the one port may also be called a complex path coefficient), and ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are the paths of users 1 and 2 respectively.
  • Time delay (assuming ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 ), UE1 and UE2 multiplex the same CSI-RS port.
  • the estimated path coefficient on the UE side is
  • K is the number of subbands described by ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 with It can be seen from the comparison that the matrix Q can be designed such that That is, the signal-to-interference ratio of the estimated path complex coefficients is improved, especially when w 1 and w 2 are not orthogonal, Q can be selected so that Q H w 1 and w 2 are orthogonal. At this time, the CSI-RS is multiplexed, and there is no interference.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may include a communication unit 1100 and a processing unit 1200 .
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the terminal equipment in the above apparatus embodiments, for example, may be a terminal equipment, or a chip configured in the terminal equipment.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 300 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the method 300 in FIG. 3 . Moreover, each unit in the communication apparatus 1000 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 300 in FIG. 3 .
  • the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the step 310 in the method 300 involving terminal reception, and to execute the steps 330 and 340 involve the terminal sending, the processing unit 1200 may be used to perform step 320 in method 300 .
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the method 400 in FIG. 4 . Moreover, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 400 in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the steps 410 and 420 of the method 400 involving terminal reception, and the processing unit 1200 to execute the steps 440 and 450 involve the terminal transmission. may be used to perform step 430 in method 400 .
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the method 500 in FIG. 5 . Moreover, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 500 in FIG. 5 .
  • the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the steps 510 and 520 in the method 500 involving terminal reception, and the processing unit 1200 to execute the steps 540, 550 and 560 involve the terminal sending. may be used to perform step 530 in method 500 .
  • the communication unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 7
  • the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may Corresponds to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the communication unit 1100 in the communication apparatus 1000 may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output/input circuit, a pin or a related circuit etc.
  • the processing unit 1200 may be a processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 300 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the network device in the method 300 of FIG. 3 . Moreover, each unit in the communication apparatus 1000 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 300 in FIG. 3 .
  • the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the step 310 of the method 300 involving sending by the network device, and be used to execute the steps 330 and 340 involving the receiving of the network device.
  • Unit 1200 may be configured to perform the steps of method 300 for generating a precoding reference signal.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the apparatus executed by the network device in the method 400 of FIG. 4 . Moreover, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 400 in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the steps 410 and 420 of the method 400 involving sending by the network device, and to execute the steps 440 and 450 involving the receiving of the network device, and the processing
  • the unit 1200 may be configured to perform the steps of generating the precoding reference signal and the second indication information in the method 400 .
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the apparatus executed by the network device in the method 500 of FIG. 5 . Moreover, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 500 in FIG. 5 .
  • the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the steps 510 and 520 of the method 500 involving sending by the network device, and be used to execute the steps 540, 550 and 560 involving the receiving of the network device.
  • the unit 1200 may be configured to perform the step of generating the precoding reference signal and/or the second indication information in the method 500 .
  • the communication unit in the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network apparatus 3000 shown in FIG. 8
  • the processing unit 1200 in the communication apparatus 1000 may Corresponds to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 8 .
  • the communication unit 1100 in the communication apparatus 1000 may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output/input circuit, a pin or a related circuit etc.
  • the processing unit 1200 may be a processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 2000 can be applied to the systems shown in FIGS. 1 a and 1 b to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020 .
  • the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030 .
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2020 and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 2030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used to retrieve data from the memory 2030 The computer program is called and executed to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for sending the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through wireless signals.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program codes stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions.
  • the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010 .
  • the processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 6 .
  • the foregoing transceiver 2020 may correspond to the communication unit in FIG. 6 , and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used for receiving signals, and the transmitter is used for transmitting signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 7 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 4 .
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing apparatus embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 may be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing apparatus embodiments that are implemented inside the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing apparatus embodiments that the terminal equipment sends to or receives from the network device. action.
  • the transceiver 2020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing apparatus embodiments that the terminal equipment sends to or receives from the network device. action.
  • the above terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, a sensor 2100, etc., the audio circuit Speakers 2082, microphones 2084, etc. may also be included.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 3000 may be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1a to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the network device 3000 may include CU, DU, and AAU.
  • the network device is composed of one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) and one or more radio frequency units.
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • BBU base band unit
  • the non-real-time part of the original BBU will be divided and redefined as CU, which is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services.
  • Part of the physical layer processing function of the BBU is merged with the original RRU and passive antenna into AAU, and the remaining functions of the BBU are redefined as DU.
  • CU and DU are distinguished by the real-time nature of processing content, and AAU is a combination of RRU and antenna.
  • FIG. 8 is only an example, and the protection scope of the present application is not limited.
  • the deployment form may also be that DUs are deployed in the BBU equipment room, CUs are deployed in a centralized manner, or DUs are centrally deployed, and CUs are centralized at higher levels.
  • the AAU 3100 can implement a transceiving function and is called a transceiving unit 3100, which corresponds to the communication unit 1100 in FIG. 6 .
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102 .
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or called a receiver, a receiving circuit), and the sending unit may correspond to a transmitter (or called a transmitter, a sending circuit).
  • the CU and DU 3200 can implement an internal processing function called a processing unit 3200, which corresponds to the processing unit 1200 in FIG. 6 .
  • the processing unit 3200 may control network devices, etc., and may be referred to as a controller.
  • the AAU, the CU and the DU may be physically set together, or may be physically separated.
  • the network device is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 8, and can also be in other forms: for example: including BBU and adaptive radio unit (adaptive radio unit, ARU), or including BBU and active antenna unit (active antenna unit, AAU) ); may also be customer terminal equipment (customer premises equipment, CPE), or may be other forms, which are not limited in this application.
  • BBU and adaptive radio unit adaptive radio unit, ARU
  • BBU and active antenna unit active antenna unit, AAU
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • the processing unit 3200 may be composed of one or more boards, and the multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or may support different access standards respectively.
  • wireless access network such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks.
  • the BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202.
  • the memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 3202 is configured to control the network device to perform necessary actions, for example, configured to control the network device to execute the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the memory 3201 and processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board.
  • the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 8 can implement the network device functions involved in the method embodiments of FIGS. 3-5 .
  • the operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 3000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes executed by the network device in the method embodiments of the present application. To avoid repetition, the detailed description is appropriately omitted here.
  • the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 8 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of network device structures that may appear in the future.
  • the above-mentioned CU and DU 3200 can be used to perform the actions implemented by the network device described in the previous method embodiments, and the AAU 3100 can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiments. Send to or receive from the terminal device. action.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a processing apparatus, including a processor and a communication interface; the processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the processing apparatus implements the methods in the above method embodiments.
  • the above processing device may be a chip or a chip system.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a It is a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. on the chip or the chip system.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • each step of the above-mentioned apparatus may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the apparatus disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above device in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here.
  • the processor in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability.
  • each step of the foregoing apparatus embodiment may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the apparatus disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above device in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the steps shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 .
  • the present application further provides a computer-readable medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the programs shown in FIGS. 3-5 .
  • the present application further provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, high-density digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state discs, SSD)) etc.
  • the network equipment in the above-mentioned various apparatus embodiments completely corresponds to the terminal equipment and the network equipment or terminal equipment in the apparatus
  • a processing unit processor
  • the number of processors may be one or more.
  • a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer.
  • an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components.
  • One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between 2 or more computers.
  • these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals
  • the disclosed systems, devices and devices may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented in software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center is by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the apparatus described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, removable hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the present application are a method and device for channel measurement. A terminal side receives a precoded reference signal from a network side, the precoded signal corresponding to one or more ports, the terminal side performs channel measurement on the basis of the precoded reference signal and of a terminal device-specific first latency and acquires a superposition coefficient corresponding to the ports, where the first latency can be indicated by the network side and can also be determined by the terminal side itself. In order for the network side to determine a codebook employed, the terminal side transmits first indication information, the first indication information being used for indicating the superposition coefficient. The present application, during channel measurement, takes into consideration the first latency specific to terminal devices, while mitigating the impact of a latency offset caused by an uplink-downlink timing error, reduces interference among multiple user CSI-RS, increases CSI-RS reuse rate, and reduces CSI-RS overhead.

Description

信道测量的方法和装置Method and apparatus for channel measurement 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种信道测量的方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communication, and more particularly, to a method and a communication device for channel measurement.
背景技术Background technique
在大规模多输入多输出(massive multiple-input multiple-output,Massive MIMO)技术中,网络设备向终端设备发送数据,需要依靠终端设备向网络设备反馈的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),终端设备反馈的CSI对系统的性能作用很大。In massive multiple-input multiple-output (Massive MIMO) technology, the network device sends data to the terminal device, and it needs to rely on the channel state information (CSI) fed back by the terminal device to the network device. The CSI fed back by the terminal equipment has a great effect on the performance of the system.
在一些系统中,如频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统,上下行物理信道具有部分的互易性,例如多径角度的互易性和时延的互易性。因此,可以基于部分互易性,来进行CSI获取方案的设计。In some systems, such as frequency division duplex (FDD) systems, uplink and downlink physical channels have partial reciprocity, such as reciprocity of multipath angle and reciprocity of time delay. Therefore, the CSI acquisition scheme can be designed based on partial reciprocity.
基于部分互易性思想,可以利用上行信道信息估计部分先验信息,包括上行信道的角度和时延信息,然后网络设备将得到的角度或者时延加载到下行导频上,并通知终端设备去测量并反馈网络设备需要获取的补充信息。最后,网络设备根据通过上行导频测得的信息和终端设备反馈的补充信息来重构下行信道或者预编码。Based on the idea of partial reciprocity, the uplink channel information can be used to estimate part of the prior information, including the angle and delay information of the uplink channel, and then the network device loads the obtained angle or delay on the downlink pilot, and notifies the terminal device to go to the Measure and feed back the supplementary information that network devices need to obtain. Finally, the network device reconstructs the downlink channel or precoding according to the information measured by the uplink pilot and the supplementary information fed back by the terminal device.
但是对于多用户网络设备将时延加载到下行导频上时,如何进行时延偏移,不会带来多用户信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS)间的干扰,不会降低CSI-RS复用率和不会增加CSI-RS开销,是个亟需解决的问题。However, when the multi-user network equipment loads the delay on the downlink pilot, how to perform the delay offset will not cause interference between the multi-user channel state information-reference signals (CSI-RS). , will not reduce the CSI-RS multiplexing rate and will not increase the CSI-RS overhead, which is an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供一种信道测量的方法和通信装置,以期在基于部分互易性思想进行信道估计时,可以降低上下行定时误差造成时延偏差的影响的同时,降低多用户CSI-RS间的干扰,提高CSI-RS复用率和减少CSI-RS开销。The present application provides a channel measurement method and a communication device, so as to reduce the influence of time delay deviation caused by uplink and downlink timing errors when performing channel estimation based on the idea of partial reciprocity, and at the same time reduce the interference between multi-user CSI-RS , improve the CSI-RS multiplexing rate and reduce the CSI-RS overhead.
第一方面,提供了一种信道测量的方法。该方法可以由第一装置执行,该第一装置可以是终端设备,或者,也可以是配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统或电路执行,本申请对此不作限定。In a first aspect, a method for channel measurement is provided. The method may be executed by a first apparatus, and the first apparatus may be a terminal device, or may also be executed by a chip, a chip system or a circuit configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
该方法可以包括:接收预编码参考信号,所述预编码参考信号对应一个或多个端口;基于所述预编码参考信号和终端设备特定的第一时延,进行信道测量,获得各个所述端口对应的叠加系数;发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述叠加系数。The method may include: receiving a precoding reference signal, where the precoding reference signal corresponds to one or more ports; and performing channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and a terminal-specific first delay to obtain each of the ports corresponding superposition coefficient; and send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficient.
基于上述技术方案,在信道测量时考虑针对各终端设备的特定的第一时延,可以降低上下行定时误差造成时延偏差的影响的同时,降低多用户CSI-RS间的干扰,提高CSI-RS复用率和减少CSI-RS开销。Based on the above technical solutions, considering the specific first delay for each terminal device during channel measurement, it can reduce the influence of the delay deviation caused by the uplink and downlink timing errors, reduce the interference between multi-user CSI-RS, and improve the CSI-RS. RS multiplexing rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
结合第一方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示针对终端设备特定的第二时延。可以理解,终端设备特定的第一时延,可以根据网络侧指示的第二时延获得。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations, the method further includes receiving second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a second delay specific to the terminal device. It can be understood that the specific first delay of the terminal device can be obtained according to the second delay indicated by the network side.
结合第一方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一时延。可以理解,终端侧可将终端设备特定的第一时延指示给网络侧,从而在由终端侧确定第一时延的情况下,实现网络侧和终端侧的对齐。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes sending fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay. It can be understood that the terminal side can indicate the first delay specific to the terminal device to the network side, so as to realize the alignment of the network side and the terminal side when the first delay is determined by the terminal side.
结合第一方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口的端口选择矩阵。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes sending third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a port selection matrix of the port.
第二方面,提供了一种信道测量的方法。该方法可以由第二装置执行,该第二装置可以是网络设备,或者,也可以是配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统或电路执行,本申请对此不作限定。In a second aspect, a method for channel measurement is provided. The method may be executed by a second apparatus, which may be a network device, or may also be executed by a chip, a chip system, or a circuit configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
该方法可以包括:生成预编码参考信号,所述预编码参考信号对应一个或多个端口;发送所述预编码参考信号;接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示各个所述端口对应的叠加系数,所述叠加系数关联针对终端设备特定的第一时延。The method may include: generating a precoding reference signal, where the precoding reference signal corresponds to one or more ports; sending the precoding reference signal; and receiving first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate each of the The superposition coefficient corresponding to the port, where the superposition coefficient is associated with the first delay specific to the terminal device.
基于上述技术方案,在信道测量时考虑针对各终端设备的特定的第一时延,可以降低上下行定时误差造成时延偏差的影响的同时,降低多用户CSI-RS间的干扰,提高CSI-RS复用率和减少CSI-RS开销。Based on the above technical solutions, considering the specific first delay for each terminal device during channel measurement, it can reduce the influence of the delay deviation caused by the uplink and downlink timing errors, reduce the interference between multi-user CSI-RS, and improve the CSI-RS. RS multiplexing rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
结合第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示针对终端设备特定的第二时延。可以理解,终端设备特定的第一时延,可以根据网络侧指示的第二时延获得。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes sending second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a second delay specific to the terminal device. It can be understood that the specific first delay of the terminal device can be obtained according to the second delay indicated by the network side.
结合第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一时延。可以理解,终端侧可将终端设备特定的第一时延指示给网络侧,从而在由终端侧确定第一时延的情况下,实现网络侧和终端侧的对齐。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the method further includes receiving fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay. It can be understood that the terminal side can indicate the first delay specific to the terminal device to the network side, so as to realize the alignment of the network side and the terminal side when the first delay is determined by the terminal side.
结合第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口的端口选择矩阵。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the method further includes receiving third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a port selection matrix of the port.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000001
其中W 1为所述端口的端口选择矩阵,W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,W f是频率分量矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000002
表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。可以理解,该新型的码本结构,能够提高码本计算精度。
With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports are used to determine the first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000001
Wherein W 1 is the port selection matrix of the port, W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, and W f is the frequency component matrix,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000002
represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q. It can be understood that the novel codebook structure can improve the calculation accuracy of the codebook.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000003
其中W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,或者W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数中所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵;W f是频率分量矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000004
表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。可以理解,该新型的码本结构,能够提高码本计算精度。
With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports are used to determine the first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000003
Wherein W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, or W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports in the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports; W f is the frequency component matrix,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000004
represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q. It can be understood that the novel codebook structure can improve the calculation accuracy of the codebook.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述Q为:In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the Q is:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000005
其中对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000006
f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,τ *为所述第一时延;或者
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000005
The elements on the diagonal are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000006
f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,...,K, K is the number of subbands, and τ * is the first delay; or
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000007
其中o=0,1,...,O-1,对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000009
K为子带的个数,O为过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本的列数,O与所述第一时延相关联;或者
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000007
Where o=0,1,...,O-1, the elements on the diagonal are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000009
K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the oversampled discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook, and O is associated with the first delay; or
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000010
其中对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000011
f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,(τ *TA)为所述第一时延,τ *为上行时延,τ TA为上下行定时偏差;或者
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000010
The elements on the diagonal are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000011
f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,..., K, K is the number of subbands, (τ *TA ) is the first delay, and τ * is the uplink delay , τ TA is the uplink and downlink timing offset; or
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000012
其中o=0,1,...,O-1,o′=0,1,...,O′-1,对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000013
K为子带的个数,O为第一过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本的列数,O’为第二过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本的列数,O和O’与所述第一时延相关联。
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000012
Where o=0,1,...,O-1, o'=0,1,...,O'-1, the elements on the diagonal are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000013
K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the first oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook, O' is the number of columns of the second oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook, O and O' are the same as The first time delay is associated.
可以理解,所述第一过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本可以由网络设备确定,所述第二过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本可以由终端设备确定,也就是说O由网络设备确定,O’由终端设备确定。It can be understood that the first oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook may be determined by a network device, and the second oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook may be determined by a terminal device, that is, O is determined by a network device. OK, O' is determined by the terminal device.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述第二指示信息包括所述第二时延的信息,或所述第二指示信息包括过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本的索引。可以理解,第二指示信息可以直接或间接指示所述第二时延。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the second indication information includes information of the second time delay, or the second indication information includes oversampling discrete Fourier transform DFT The index of the codebook. It can be understood that the second indication information may directly or indirectly indicate the second delay.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述第二时延为所述第一时延。可以理解,网络侧指示的第二时延即为所述第一时延,终端侧直接使用网络侧指示的时延进行信道测量,降低了计算复杂度。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the second delay is the first delay. It can be understood that the second delay indicated by the network side is the first delay, and the terminal side directly uses the delay indicated by the network side to perform channel measurement, which reduces computational complexity.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一时延为在所述第二时延对应的预定时延范围内确定的时延。可以理解,网络侧指示的第二时延仅作为参考,终端侧还需要进一步确定所述第一时延,避免了上下行存在定时偏差时信道测量不准确,提高了信道测量的准确性,并且基于参考网络侧指示的时延,在一定范围内确定所述第一时延,降低了计算量和处理复杂度。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the first delay is a delay determined within a predetermined delay range corresponding to the second delay. It can be understood that the second delay indicated by the network side is only for reference, and the terminal side needs to further determine the first delay, so as to avoid inaccurate channel measurement when there is a timing deviation between uplink and downlink, and improve the accuracy of channel measurement, and The first delay is determined within a certain range based on the delay indicated by the reference network side, which reduces the amount of calculation and processing complexity.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述第一时延为进行时延调节量估计所获得的时延。可以理解,网络侧可以不进行时延偏移,由终端侧直接确定所述第一时延,提高了信道测量的准确性。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the first delay is a delay obtained by estimating a delay adjustment amount. It can be understood that the network side may not perform delay offset, and the terminal side directly determines the first delay, which improves the accuracy of channel measurement.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,所述第四指示信息包括所述第一时延的信息,或所述第四指示信息包括用于获得所述第一时延的时延调节量的信息。可以理解,第四指示信息可以直接或间接指示所述第一时延。With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the fourth indication information includes information about the first time delay, or the fourth indication information includes information for obtaining the first time delay Information about the delay adjustment amount of the delay. It can be understood that the fourth indication information may directly or indirectly indicate the first delay.
第三方面,提供一种信道测量的装置,所述装置可以是通信装置,用于执行上述第一方面提供的通信方法。具体地,所述装置可以包括用于执行第一方面提供的通信方法的单 元和/或模块,如处理单元和/或通信单元。In a third aspect, an apparatus for channel measurement is provided, and the apparatus may be a communication apparatus, configured to execute the communication method provided in the above-mentioned first aspect. Specifically, the apparatus may include a unit and/or a module for executing the communication method provided by the first aspect, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit.
在一种实现方式中,该装置为终端设备。当该装置为终端设备时,所述通信单元可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口;所述处理单元可以是处理器。In an implementation manner, the apparatus is a terminal device. When the apparatus is a terminal device, the communication unit may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface; the processing unit may be a processor.
在另一种实现方式中,该装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统。当该装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,所述通信单元可以是该芯片或芯片系统上输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等;所述处理单元可以是处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路等。In another implementation manner, the apparatus is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device. When the device is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the communication unit may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. on the chip or the chip system; The processing unit may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第四方面,提供一种信道测量的装置,所述装置可以是通信装置,用于执行上述第二方面提供的通信方法。具体地,所述装置可以包括用于执行第二方面提供的通信方法的单元和/或模块,如处理单元和/或通信单元。In a fourth aspect, an apparatus for channel measurement is provided, and the apparatus may be a communication apparatus for executing the communication method provided in the second aspect. Specifically, the apparatus may include a unit and/or a module for executing the communication method provided by the second aspect, such as a processing unit and/or a communication unit.
在一种实现方式中,该装置为网络设备。当该装置为网络设备时,所述通信单元可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口;所述处理单元可以是处理器。In one implementation, the apparatus is a network device. When the apparatus is a network device, the communication unit may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface; the processing unit may be a processor.
在另一种实现方式中,该装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统。当该装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,所述通信单元可以是该芯片或芯片系统上输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等;所述处理单元可以是处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路等。In another implementation manner, the apparatus is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device. When the device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the communication unit may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. on the chip or the chip system; The processing unit may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第五方面,提供一种处理装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面以第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。可选地,该处理装置还包括存储器。可选地,该处理装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合,所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。In a fifth aspect, a processing apparatus is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory, so as to implement the communication method of the above-mentioned first aspect in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect. Optionally, the processing device further includes a memory. Optionally, the processing device further includes a communication interface to which the processor is coupled, and the communication interface is used for inputting and/or outputting information. The information includes at least one of instructions and data.
在一种实现方式中,该处理装置为终端设备。当该处理装置为终端设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the processing apparatus is a terminal device. When the processing device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该处理装置为芯片或芯片系统。当该处理装置为芯片或芯片系统时,所述通信接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。In another implementation, the processing device is a chip or a system of chips. When the processing device is a chip or a chip system, the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip or a chip system. The processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
在另一种实现方式中,该处理装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统。In another implementation manner, the processing device is a chip or a chip system configured in the terminal device.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第六方面,提供一种处理装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第二方面以及第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。可选地,该处理装置还包括存储器。可选地,该处理装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合,所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。In a sixth aspect, a processing apparatus is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the second aspect and the communication method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. Optionally, the processing device further includes a memory. Optionally, the processing device further includes a communication interface to which the processor is coupled, and the communication interface is used for inputting and/or outputting information. The information includes at least one of instructions and data.
在一种实现方式中,该处理装置为网络设备。当该处理装置为网络设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the processing apparatus is a network device. When the processing device is a network device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该处理装置为芯片或芯片系统。当该处理装置为芯片或芯片系统时,所述通信接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。In another implementation, the processing device is a chip or a system of chips. When the processing device is a chip or a chip system, the communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip or a chip system. The processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
在另一种实现方式中,该处理装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统。In another implementation manner, the processing device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第七方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被通信装置执行时,使得所述通信装置实现第一方面以及第一方面的任一可能的实现方式中的通信方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a communication device, the communication device enables the communication device to realize the first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect communication method in .
第八方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被通信装置执行时,使得所述通信装置实现第二方面以及第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的通信方法。In an eighth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a communication device, enables the communication device to realize the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect communication method in .
第九方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述指令被计算机执行时使得通信装置实现第一方面提供的通信方法。A ninth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which when executed by a computer cause a communication apparatus to implement the communication method provided in the first aspect.
第十方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述指令被计算机执行时使得通信装置实现第二方面提供的通信方法。A tenth aspect provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which when executed by a computer cause a communication apparatus to implement the communication method provided by the second aspect.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, including the aforementioned network device and terminal device.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1a和图1b是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意图;1a and 1b are schematic diagrams of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图2是针对所有用户统一偏移到时延0点的示意图;Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of uniformly shifting to delay 0 for all users;
图3是根据本申请一实施例的信道测量的方法的示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of a method for channel measurement according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4是根据本申请另一实施例的信道测量的方法的示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a method for channel measurement according to another embodiment of the present application;
图5是根据本申请又一实施例的信道测量的方法的示意图;5 is a schematic diagram of a method for channel measurement according to yet another embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;7 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(univeRMal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统或新无线(new radio,NR)等。其中,5G移动通信系统可以包括非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)和/或独立组网(standalone,SA)。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex) , TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system or new radio (NR), etc. The 5G mobile communication system may include a non-standalone (NSA, NSA) and/or an independent network (standalone, SA).
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统,如第六代移动通信系统。通信系统还可以是PLMN网络、设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络、物联网(internet of things,IoT)网络或者其他网络。其中,IoT 网络例如可以包括车联网。其中,车联网系统中的通信方式统称为V2X(X代表任何事物),例如,该V2X通信包括:车辆与车辆(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)通信,车辆与路边基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)通信、车辆与行人之间的通信(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)或车辆与网络(vehicle to network,V2N)通信等。The technical solutions provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation mobile communication system. The communication system may also be a PLMN network, a device-to-device (D2D) network, a machine-to-machine (M2M) network, an internet of things (IoT) network, or other networks. The IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles. Among them, the communication methods in the Internet of Vehicles system are collectively referred to as V2X (X stands for anything). For example, the V2X communication includes: vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I) communication ) communication, vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P) or vehicle-to-network (V2N) communication, etc.
本申请实施例中的终端设备也可以称为:用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、终端设备、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。The terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as: user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, terminal device, wireless communication device, user agent or user equipment, etc.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to the user, such as a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and the like. At present, some examples of terminals are: mobile phone (mobile phone), tablet computer, notebook computer, PDA, mobile internet device (MID), wearable device, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grids wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, wireless terminal in smart home, cellular phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol , SIP) telephones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, automotive A device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a 5G network, or a terminal device in a future evolved public land mobile network (public land mobile network, PLMN), etc., are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。As an example and not a limitation, in this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices, which are the general term for the intelligent design of daily wear and the development of wearable devices using wearable technology, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
此外,在本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以是IoT系统中的终端设备,IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。在本申请实施例中,IoT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band)NB技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the IoT system. IoT is an important part of the future development of information technology. Interconnection, the intelligent network of the interconnection of things and things. In the embodiment of the present application, the IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power saving of the terminal through, for example, a narrowband (narrow band) NB technology.
此外,在本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以包括智能打印机、火车探测器、加油站等传感器,主要功能包括收集数据(部分终端设备)、接收网络设备的控制信息与下行数据,并发送电磁波,向网络设备传输上行数据。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, and gas stations, and the main functions include collecting data (part of terminal devices), receiving control information and downlink data of network devices, and sending electromagnetic waves. , to transmit uplink data to the network device.
另外,本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备,该网络设备可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该网络设备可以为 中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等,本申请实施例并不限定。In addition, the network device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with terminal devices, and the network device may be an evolved NodeB (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB) in an LTE system, or a cloud wireless access network A wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the network device can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and a network device in a future 5G network or a network in a future evolved PLMN network Devices, etc., are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是无线网络中的设备,例如将终端接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点。目前,一些RAN节点的举例为:下一代基站gNB、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、家庭基站、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),或WiFi系统中的接入点(access point,AP)等。The network device in this embodiment of the present application may be a device in a wireless network, for example, a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node that accesses a terminal to the wireless network. At present, some examples of RAN nodes are: next-generation base station gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), home base station, baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), or Access point (access point, AP) in WiFi system, etc.
在一种网络结构中,网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备、或者控制面CU节点(CU-CP节点)和用户面CU节点(CU-UP节点)以及DU节点的RAN设备。In a network structure, a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU). - RAN equipment for CP nodes) and user plane CU nodes (CU-UP nodes) and DU nodes.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且,本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. This hardware layer includes hardware such as central processing unit (CPU), memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also called main memory). The operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system. The application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software. In addition, the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application can be executed to provide the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application. For example, the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute a program.
另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。Additionally, various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" as used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer readable device, carrier or medium. For example, computer readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs) etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), card, stick or key drives, etc.). Additionally, various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先结合图1a和图1b详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, firstly, a communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application is described in detail with reference to FIG. 1a and FIG. 1b.
图1a是适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统100的一示意图。如1图所示,该无线通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,例如图1a所示的网络设备111,该无线通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,例如图1a所示的终端设备121至终端设备123。网络设备和终端设备均可配置多个天线,网络设备与终端设备可使用多天线技术通信。FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 100 suitable for this embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1, the wireless communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 111 shown in FIG. 1a, and the wireless communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 121 shown in FIG. 1a. to the terminal device 123. Both the network device and the terminal device can be configured with multiple antennas, and the network device and the terminal device can communicate using the multi-antenna technology.
其中,网络设备和终端设备通信时,网络设备可以管理一个或多个小区,一个小区中可以有整数个终端设备。可选地,网络设备111和终端设备121至终端设备123组成一个单小区通信系统,不失一般性,将小区记为小区#1。网络设备111可以是小区#1中的网络设备,或者说,网络设备111可以为小区#1中的终端设备(例如终端设备121)服务。Wherein, when the network device communicates with the terminal device, the network device can manage one or more cells, and there can be an integer number of terminal devices in one cell. Optionally, the network device 111 and the terminal device 121 to the terminal device 123 form a single-cell communication system, and without loss of generality, the cell is denoted as cell #1. The network device 111 may be a network device in cell #1, or in other words, the network device 111 may serve a terminal device (eg, terminal device 121) in cell #1.
需要说明的是,小区可以理解为网络设备的无线信号覆盖范围内的区域。It should be noted that a cell can be understood as an area within the coverage range of a wireless signal of a network device.
图1b是适用于本申请实施例的无线通信系统200的另一示意图。如2图所示,本申请实施例的技术方案还可以应用于D2D通信。该无线通信系统200包括多个终端设备,例如图1b中的终端设备124至终端设备126。终端设备124至终端设备126之间可以直接进行通信。例如,终端设备124和终端设备125可以单独或同时发送数据给终端设备126。FIG. 1b is another schematic diagram of a wireless communication system 200 suitable for the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2 , the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to D2D communication. The wireless communication system 200 includes a plurality of terminal devices, such as terminal device 124 to terminal device 126 in FIG. 1b. Communication between the terminal device 124 and the terminal device 126 can be performed directly. For example, terminal device 124 and terminal device 125 may transmit data to terminal device 126 individually or simultaneously.
应理解,上述图1a和图1b仅是示例性说明,本申请并未限定于此。例如,本申请实施例可以应用于任一通信系统中,只要该通信系统中存在至少两个设备,其中,一设备需要发送预编码参考信号;另一设备接收该预编码参考信号,进行信道测量并反馈信道状态信息。It should be understood that the above-mentioned FIG. 1 a and FIG. 1 b are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto. For example, the embodiments of the present application can be applied to any communication system as long as there are at least two devices in the communication system, wherein one device needs to send a precoding reference signal; the other device receives the precoding reference signal and performs channel measurement And feedback channel state information.
为便于理解本申请实施例,下面首先对本申请中涉及的几个术语做简单介绍。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly introduces several terms involved in the present application.
1、预编码技术:网络设备可以在已知信道状态的情况下,借助与信道状态相匹配的预编码矩阵来对待发送信号进行处理,使得经过预编码的待发送信号与信道相适配,从而使得接收设备消除信道间影响的复杂度降低。因此,通过对待发送信号的预编码处理,接收信号质量(例如信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)等)得以提升。因此,采用预编码技术,可以实现发送设备与多个接收设备在相同的时频资源上传输,也就是实现了多用户多输入多输出(multiple user multiple input multiple output,MU-MIMO)。1. Precoding technology: When the channel state is known, the network device can process the signal to be sent with the help of a precoding matrix that matches the channel state, so that the precoded signal to be sent is adapted to the channel, thereby This reduces the complexity for the receiving device to eliminate the influence between channels. Therefore, the received signal quality (eg, signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.) is improved through the precoding process of the signal to be transmitted. Therefore, by using precoding technology, the transmitting device and multiple receiving devices can transmit on the same time-frequency resources, that is, multi-user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) is realized.
应理解,本文中有关预编码技术的相关描述仅为便于理解而示例,并非用于限制本申请实施例的保护范围。在具体实现过程中,发送设备还可以通过其他方式进行预编码。例如,在无法获知信道信息(例如但不限于信道矩阵)的情况下,采用预先设置的预编码矩阵或者加权处理方式进行预编码等。为了简洁,其具体内容本文不再赘述。It should be understood that the relevant descriptions of the precoding technology herein are only examples for ease of understanding, and are not used to limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. In a specific implementation process, the sending device may also perform precoding in other manners. For example, in the case where the channel information (eg, but not limited to, the channel matrix) cannot be obtained, a preset precoding matrix or a weighting processing method is used to perform precoding and the like. For the sake of brevity, the specific content will not be repeated here.
2、信道互易性:在时分双工(time division duplexing,TDD)模式下,上下行信道在相同的频域资源上不同的时域资源上传输信号。在相对较短的时间(如,信道传播的相干时间)之内,可以认为上、下行信道上的信号所经历的信道衰落是相同的。这就是上下行信道的互易性。基于上下行信道的互易性,网络设备可以根据上行参考信号,如探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS),测量上行信道,并可以根据上行信道来估计下行信道,从而可以确定用于下行传输的预编码矩阵。2. Channel reciprocity: In the time division duplexing (TDD) mode, the uplink and downlink channels transmit signals on different time domain resources on the same frequency domain resource. Within a relatively short time (eg, the coherence time of channel propagation), it can be considered that the channel fading experienced by the signals on the uplink and downlink channels is the same. This is the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels. Based on the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the network device can measure the uplink channel according to the uplink reference signal, such as the sounding reference signal (SRS), and can estimate the downlink channel according to the uplink channel, so that it can be determined for downlink transmission. the precoding matrix.
在频分双工(frequency division duplexing,FDD)模式下的上下行信道具有部分的互易性,例如,角度的互易性和时延的互易性,换句话说,时延和角度在FDD模式下的上下行信道具有互易性。因此,角度和时延也可以称为互易性参数。The uplink and downlink channels in frequency division duplexing (FDD) mode have partial reciprocity, for example, the reciprocity of angle and the reciprocity of delay, in other words, the delay and angle in FDD The uplink and downlink channels in this mode are reciprocal. Therefore, angle and delay can also be called reciprocity parameters.
由于信号在经过无线信道传输时,从发射天线可以经过多个路径到达接收天线。多径时延导致频率选择性衰落,就是频域信道的变化。时延是无线信号在不同传输路径上的传输时间,由距离和速度决定,与无线信号的频域没有关系。信号在不同的传输路径上传输时,由于距离不同,存在不同的传输时延。因此,时延在FDD模式下的上下行信道可以认为是相同的,或者说,互易的。Since the signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, there are multiple paths from the transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna. The multipath delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of the frequency domain channel. Delay is the transmission time of wireless signals on different transmission paths, which is determined by distance and speed, and has nothing to do with the frequency domain of wireless signals. When signals are transmitted on different transmission paths, there are different transmission delays due to different distances. Therefore, the uplink and downlink channels in the FDD mode with time delay can be considered to be the same, or reciprocal.
此外,角度可以是指信号经由无线信道到达接收天线的到达角(angle of arrival,AOA),也可以是指通过发射天线发射信号的离开角(angle of departure,AOD)。在本申请实施例中,该角度可以是指上行信号到达网络设备的到达角,也可以是指网络设备发射下行信号的离开角。该上行参考信号的到达角和下行参考信号的离开角可以认为是相同的,或者 说,互易的。因此,角度在FDD模式下的上下行信道具有互易性。In addition, the angle may refer to the angle of arrival (AOA) at which the signal reaches the receiving antenna via the wireless channel, or may refer to the angle of departure (AOD) of the signal transmitted through the transmitting antenna. In this embodiment of the present application, the angle may refer to the arrival angle of the uplink signal reaching the network device, or may refer to the departure angle of the network device transmitting the downlink signal. The arrival angle of the uplink reference signal and the departure angle of the downlink reference signal can be considered to be the same, or reciprocal. Therefore, the angle of the uplink and downlink channels in the FDD mode is reciprocal.
3、参考信号(reference signal,RS):也可以称为导频(pilot)、参考序列等。在本申请实施例中,参考信号可以是用于信道测量的参考信号。例如,该参考信号可以是用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS),也可以是用于上行信道测量的探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。应理解,上文列举的参考信号仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他参考信号以实现相同或相似功能的可能。3. Reference signal (reference signal, RS): It may also be called a pilot (pilot), a reference sequence, and the like. In this embodiment of the present application, the reference signal may be a reference signal used for channel measurement. For example, the reference signal may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) used for downlink channel measurement, or may be a sounding reference signal (Sounding reference signal, SRS) used for uplink channel measurement. It should be understood that the reference signals listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals in future protocols to achieve the same or similar functions.
预编码参考信号可以是对参考信号进行预编码后得到的参考信号。其中,预编码具体可以包括波束赋形(beamforming)和/或相位旋转。其中,波束赋形例如可以通过基于一个或多个角度向量对下行参考信号进行预编码来实现,相位旋转例如可以通过将一个或多个时延向量对下行参考信号进行预编码来实现。The precoding reference signal may be a reference signal obtained by precoding the reference signal. The precoding may specifically include beamforming (beamforming) and/or phase rotation. The beamforming can be implemented by, for example, precoding the downlink reference signal based on one or more angle vectors, and the phase rotation can be implemented by, for example, precoding the downlink reference signal with one or more delay vectors.
在本申请实施例中,为方便区分和说明,将经过预编码,如波束赋形和/或相位旋转,得到的参考信号称为预编码参考信号;未经过预编码的参考信号简称为参考信号。In the embodiments of the present application, for the convenience of distinction and description, a reference signal obtained by precoding, such as beamforming and/or phase rotation, is referred to as a precoded reference signal; a reference signal without precoding is referred to as a reference signal for short .
在本申请实施例中,基于一个或多个角度向量对下行参考信号进行预编码,也可以称为,将一个或多个角度向量加载到下行参考信号上,以实现波束赋形。基于一个或多个时延向量对下行参考信号进行预编码,也可以称为将一个或多个时延向量加载到下行参考信号上,以实现相位旋转。基于一个或多个时延向量对下行参考信号进行预编码,也可以称为将一个或多个相对时延向量加载到下行参考信号上,以实现相位旋转。关于相对时延,下文实施例中具体描述。In this embodiment of the present application, precoding the downlink reference signal based on one or more angle vectors may also be referred to as loading one or more angle vectors onto the downlink reference signal to implement beamforming. Precoding the downlink reference signal based on one or more delay vectors may also be referred to as loading one or more delay vectors onto the downlink reference signal to implement phase rotation. Precoding the downlink reference signal based on one or more delay vectors may also be referred to as loading one or more relative delay vectors onto the downlink reference signal to implement phase rotation. The relative time delay will be specifically described in the following embodiments.
4、端口(port):可以理解为被接收设备所识别的虚拟天线。在本申请实施例中,端口可以是指参考信号发送端口、发射天线端口,例如,每个端口的参考信号可以是未经过预编码的参考信号,也可以是至少基于一个时延向量对参考信号进行预编码得到的预编码参考信号;端口也可以是指经过波束赋形后的参考信号端口,例如,每个端口对应的参考信号可以是基于一个角度向量对参考信号进行预编码得到的预编码参考信号,也可以是基于一个角度向量和一个时延向量对参考信号进行预编码得到的预编码参考信号。每个端口的信号可以通过一个或者多个资源块(resource block,RB)传输。4. Port: It can be understood as a virtual antenna recognized by the receiving device. In this embodiment of the present application, a port may refer to a reference signal transmission port or a transmit antenna port. For example, the reference signal of each port may be an unprecoded reference signal, or a reference signal based on at least one delay vector. The precoding reference signal obtained by precoding; the port may also refer to the reference signal port after beamforming, for example, the reference signal corresponding to each port may be the precoding obtained by precoding the reference signal based on an angle vector The reference signal may also be a precoded reference signal obtained by precoding the reference signal based on an angle vector and a delay vector. The signal of each port can be transmitted through one or more resource blocks (RBs).
其中,发射天线端口,可以是指实际的独立发送单元(transceiver unit,TxRU)。可以理解的是,若对参考信号做了空域预编码,则端口数可以是指参考信号端口数,该参考信号端口数可以小于发射天线端口数。The transmit antenna port may refer to an actual independent transmit unit (transceiver unit, TxRU). It can be understood that if spatial domain precoding is performed on the reference signal, the number of ports may refer to the number of reference signal ports, and the number of reference signal ports may be smaller than the number of transmit antenna ports.
在下文示出的实施例中,在涉及发射天线端口时,可以是指未进行空域预编码的端口数。即,是实际的独立发送单元数。在涉及端口时,在不同的实施例中,可以是指发射天线端口,也可以是指参考信号端口。端口所表达的具体含义可以根据具体实施例来确定。In the embodiments shown below, when referring to transmit antenna ports, it may refer to the number of ports that are not subjected to spatial precoding. That is, it is the actual number of independent transmission units. When referring to a port, in different embodiments, it may refer to a transmit antenna port or a reference signal port. The specific meaning expressed by the port can be determined according to the specific embodiment.
5、角度向量:可以理解为用于对参考信号进行波束赋形的预编码向量。通过波束赋形,可以使得发射出来的参考信号具有一定的空间指向性。因此,基于角度向量对参考信号进行预编码的过程也可以视为是空间域(或简称,空域)预编码的过程。5. Angle vector: It can be understood as a precoding vector used for beamforming the reference signal. Through beamforming, the transmitted reference signal can have a certain spatial directivity. Therefore, the process of precoding the reference signal based on the angle vector can also be regarded as a process of spatial domain (or simply, spatial domain) precoding.
基于一个或多个角度向量对参考信号进行预编码后得到的预编码参考信号的端口数与角度向量的个数相同。The number of ports of the precoded reference signal obtained by precoding the reference signal based on one or more angle vectors is the same as the number of angle vectors.
可选地,角度向量取自(过采样)离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)矩阵。Optionally, the angle vector is taken from an (oversampled) Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) matrix.
加载了角度向量的参考信号可以通过下行信道传输至终端设备,因此,终端设备根据接收到的预编码参考信号测量的信道等效于加载了角度向量的信道。The reference signal loaded with the angle vector can be transmitted to the terminal device through the downlink channel, so the channel measured by the terminal device according to the received precoding reference signal is equivalent to the channel loaded with the angle vector.
应理解,角度向量是本申请提出的用于表示角度的一种形式。角度向量仅为便于与时延区分而命名,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他名称来表示相同或相似含义的可能。It should be understood that the angle vector is a form proposed in this application for representing the angle. The angle vector is named only for convenience in distinguishing it from the time delay, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining other names in future agreements to represent the same or similar meanings.
6、频域单元:频域资源的单位,可表示不同的频域资源粒度。频域单元例如可以包括但不限于,子带(subband)、资源块(resource block,RB)、资源块组(resource block group,RBG)、预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group,PRG)等。6. Frequency domain unit: a unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different granularity of frequency domain resources. The frequency domain unit may include, but is not limited to, a subband (subband), a resource block (RB), a resource block group (RBG), a precoding resource block group (PRG), etc. .
在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以基于终端设备的反馈确定与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。In this embodiment of the present application, the network device may determine a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on feedback from the terminal device.
7、终端设备特定的(可以称为UE specific)时延:用户特定的时延,为针对终端设备,网络设备将各端口在终端侧观测到的时延移位到的时延(在时延域上可以体现为某一时延抽头,该时延为终端设备特定的,不同终端设备的时延可以不同,也可以相同),相当于终端设备的等效信道被移动到的特定的时延分量,是对路径时延所做偏移后所偏移到的时延,路径时延是某路径对应的角度时延对中时延(可以是相对时延或绝对时延),角度时延对可以是一个角度向量和一个时延向量的组合。每个角度时延对可以包括一个角度向量和一个时延向量。任意两个角度时延对中所包含的角度向量和/或时延向量不同。换句话说,每个角度时延对可以由一个角度向量和一个时延向量唯一确定。应理解,角度时延对可以理解为由一个角度向量和一个时延向量确定的空频基本单位的表现形式,但它并不一定是唯一的表现形式。例如,还可以表现为空频分量矩阵、空频分量向量等。7. Terminal device-specific (can be called UE-specific) delay: user-specific delay, for the terminal device, the network device shifts the delay observed by each port on the terminal side to the delay (in the delay It can be embodied as a certain delay tap in the domain, the delay is specific to the terminal equipment, the delay of different terminal equipment can be different or the same), which is equivalent to the specific delay component to which the equivalent channel of the terminal equipment is moved , is the offset to which the path delay is offset, the path delay is the centering delay of the angle delay corresponding to a certain path (it can be a relative delay or an absolute delay), and the angle delay is the Can be a combination of an angle vector and a delay vector. Each angle-delay pair may include an angle vector and a delay vector. The angle vectors and/or delay vectors contained in any two angle-delay pairs are different. In other words, each angle-delay pair can be uniquely determined by an angle vector and a delay vector. It should be understood that the angle-delay pair can be understood as a representation of the space-frequency basic unit determined by an angle vector and a time-delay vector, but it is not necessarily the only representation. For example, it can also be expressed as a space-frequency component matrix, a space-frequency component vector, and the like.
通过一个角度时延对可以确定一个空频分量矩阵。或者说,通过一个角度向量和一个时延向量可唯一地确定一个空频分量矩阵。一个空频分量矩阵和一个角度时延对之间可以相互转换。空频矩阵可以是用于确定预编码矩阵的一个中间量。A space-frequency component matrix can be determined by an angle-delay pair. In other words, a space-frequency component matrix can be uniquely determined by an angle vector and a delay vector. A space-frequency component matrix and an angle-delay pair can be converted to each other. The space-frequency matrix may be an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix.
关于空频分量矩阵以及空频分量向量等,可以参考现有技术的描述,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Regarding the space-frequency component matrix and the space-frequency component vector, reference may be made to the description of the prior art, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
8、时延偏移:本申请中说提及的时延偏移为网络侧将原始信道时延(可记为τ)偏移到目的时延(可记为τ’或τ *),也就是进行时延偏移后,终端侧观测到的等效信道时延是在τ’或τ *8. Delay offset: The delay offset mentioned in this application is that the network side offsets the original channel delay (can be recorded as τ) to the destination delay (can be recorded as τ' or τ * ), and also That is, after performing the delay offset, the equivalent channel delay observed by the terminal side is τ' or τ * .
9、参考信号资源:参考信号资源可用于配置参考信号的传输属性,例如,时频资源位置、端口映射关系、功率因子以及扰码等,具体可参考现有技术。发送端设备可基于参考信号资源发送参考信号,接收端设备可基于参考信号资源接收参考信号。一个参考信号资源可以包括一个或多个RB。9. Reference signal resources: The reference signal resources can be used to configure the transmission properties of the reference signal, such as time-frequency resource location, port mapping relationship, power factor, and scrambling code, etc. For details, please refer to the prior art. The transmitting end device may transmit the reference signal based on the reference signal resource, and the receiving end device may receive the reference signal based on the reference signal resource. One reference signal resource may include one or more RBs.
在本申请实施例中,参考信号资源例如可以是CSI-RS资源。In this embodiment of the present application, the reference signal resource may be, for example, a CSI-RS resource.
10、FDD下行信道重构(也可称为基于FDD部分互易性的CSI获取):10. FDD downlink channel reconstruction (also known as CSI acquisition based on FDD partial reciprocity):
FDD系统的基于CSI的下行信道重建方法包括以下步骤:The CSI-based downlink channel reconstruction method of the FDD system includes the following steps:
步骤一:网络设备接收终端设备发送的SRS,并利用上行SRS估计出上下行具有互易性的信息(例如,方向角、时延等);Step 1: the network device receives the SRS sent by the terminal device, and uses the uplink SRS to estimate the information (for example, direction angle, time delay, etc.) that the uplink and downlink have reciprocity;
步骤二:网络设备向终端设备发送下行参考信号,具体地,网络设备将得到的上下行具有互易性的信息加载(可以包括对时延分量进行的偏移)到下行参考信号上,通知终端 设备测量并反馈网络设备需要获取的补充信息;Step 2: The network device sends the downlink reference signal to the terminal device. Specifically, the network device loads the obtained uplink and downlink reciprocity information (which may include the offset of the delay component) on the downlink reference signal, and notifies the terminal The device measures and feeds back the supplementary information that the network device needs to obtain;
步骤三:终端设备利用下行参考信号重新估计并反馈补充信息(例如,可以是每个端口对应的全带复幅度,即各个端口对应的叠加系数);Step 3: The terminal device re-estimates and feeds back supplementary information by using the downlink reference signal (for example, it may be the full-band complex amplitude corresponding to each port, that is, the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port);
步骤四:网络设备利用所述步骤一和步骤三中获取的信息,重建下行信道,即根据获取的信息和预定码本结构,确定与信道状态相匹配的预编码矩阵来对待发送信号进行处理,使得经过预编码的待发送信号与信道相适配。Step 4: The network device uses the information obtained in the first and third steps to reconstruct the downlink channel, that is, according to the obtained information and the predetermined codebook structure, determine a precoding matrix that matches the channel state to process the signal to be sent, The precoded signal to be sent is adapted to the channel.
11、子带(subband):又可以称为子载波,用于承载信号,频域上占据一段带宽,可以体现为资源元素(resource element,RE)。本申请中提及的子带是用来发送CSI-RS的子带。11. Subband: It can also be called a subcarrier, which is used to carry signals, occupies a bandwidth in the frequency domain, and can be embodied as a resource element (RE). The subbands mentioned in this application are subbands used to transmit CSI-RS.
12、端口对应的叠加系数:又可以称为端口对应的全带复幅度,发送端口对应的叠加系数,特定情况下端口对应的叠加系数可以是路径的复幅度,信道在CSI-RS端口携带的预编码向量上的投影系数为该CSI-RS端口对应的叠加系数。UE向网络设备反馈各发送端口对应的叠加系数。网络设备利用上行估计的每条路径的方向角和时延,以及UE重估并反馈的各发送端口的叠加系数,重建下行信道。12. The superposition coefficient corresponding to the port: it can also be called the full-band complex amplitude corresponding to the port, and the superposition coefficient corresponding to the transmitting port. In a specific case, the superposition coefficient corresponding to the port can be the complex amplitude of the path. The projection coefficient on the precoding vector is the superposition coefficient corresponding to the CSI-RS port. The UE feeds back the superposition coefficient corresponding to each transmission port to the network device. The network device reconstructs the downlink channel by using the direction angle and time delay of each path estimated in the uplink and the superposition coefficient of each transmission port re-evaluated and fed back by the UE.
此外,为了便于理解本申请实施例,做出以下几点说明。In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following points are described.
第一,在本申请中,“用于指示”可以包括用于直接指示和用于间接指示。当描述某一指示信息用于指示A时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示A或间接指示A,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有A。First, in this application, "for indicating" may include both for direct indication and for indirect indication. When describing a certain indication information for indicating A, the indication information may directly indicate A or indirectly indicate A, but it does not mean that A must be carried in the indication information.
将指示信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。The information indicated by the indication information is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated. For example, but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or the information to be indicated. Indicating the index of information, etc. The information to be indicated may also be indirectly indicated by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, the indication of specific information can also be implemented by means of a pre-agreed (for example, a protocol stipulated) arrangement order of various information, so as to reduce the indication overhead to a certain extent.
待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。其中,该配置信息可以例如但不限于包括无线资源控制信令、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层信令和物理层信令中的一种或者至少两种的组合。其中,无线资源控制信令例如包无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令;MAC层信令例如包括MAC控制元素(control element,CE);物理层信令例如包括下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)。The information to be indicated may be sent together as a whole, or may be divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the transmission periods and/or transmission timings of these sub-information may be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. The sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be predefined, for example, predefined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device. Wherein, the configuration information may include, for example, but not limited to, one or a combination of at least two of radio resource control signaling, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer signaling, and physical layer signaling. Among them, the radio resource control signaling, such as packet radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling; MAC layer signaling, for example, includes MAC control element (control element, CE); physical layer signaling, for example, includes downlink control information (downlink control information). information, DCI).
第二,在下文示出的实施例中第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,第一、第二在本申请实施例中可以作为类型区分,并不作为对象内容区分。Second, in the embodiments shown below, the first, the second, and various numeral numbers are only for the convenience of description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, the first and the second may be distinguished as types in the embodiments of the present application, and not as object contents.
第三,本申请实施例中涉及的“保存”,可以是指保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器,可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器,也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码 器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。Third, the "storage" involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to storage in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be set separately, or may be integrated in an encoder or a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partially provided separately and partially integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device. The type of memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
第四,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议、WLAN协议以及其他通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Fourth, the "protocols" involved in the embodiments of this application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, such as LTE protocols, NR protocols, WLAN protocols, and related protocols in other communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
第五,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b和c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,或,b,或,c,或,a和b,或,a和c,或,b和c,或,a、b和c。其中a、b和c分别可以是单个,也可以是多个。Fifth, "at least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or", which describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can indicate: the existence of A alone, the existence of A and B at the same time, and the existence of B alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one item(s) below" or similar expressions thereof refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single item(s) or plural items(s). For example, at least one (a) of a, b and c can represent: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , b and c. Where a, b and c can be single or multiple respectively.
第六,本申请实施例中涉及DFT的可以是过采样的,也可以是没有过采样的。所以下文中,统一用“(过采样)离散傅里叶变换DFT”或者“(过采样)DFT”表示既可以是过采样的DFT,也可以是没有过采样的DFT。Sixth, the DFT involved in the embodiments of the present application may be oversampling or may not be oversampling. Therefore, hereinafter, "(oversampling) discrete Fourier transform DFT" or "(oversampling) DFT" is uniformly used to indicate that it can be either an oversampling DFT or a DFT without oversampling.
在5G通信系统中,大规模多天线技术对系统的频谱效率起到至关重要的作用。采用MIMO技术时,网络设备向终端设备发送数据时,需要进行调制编码及信号预编码。网络设备向终端设备如何发送数据,需要依靠终端设备向网络设备反馈的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),其对系统的性能作用巨大。In 5G communication systems, large-scale multi-antenna technology plays a crucial role in the spectral efficiency of the system. When the MIMO technology is used, when the network device sends data to the terminal device, modulation coding and signal precoding need to be performed. How the network device sends data to the terminal device depends on the channel state information (CSI) fed back by the terminal device to the network device, which has a huge impact on the performance of the system.
在TDD系统中,由于上行信道和下行信道使用相同的带宽,上行信道和下行信道具有互易性,网络设备侧可以利用上行信道和下行信道的互易性,通过上行信道获取下行信道的CSI,进而进行信号预编码。In the TDD system, since the uplink channel and the downlink channel use the same bandwidth, the uplink channel and the downlink channel are reciprocal, and the network device side can use the reciprocity of the uplink channel and the downlink channel to obtain the CSI of the downlink channel through the uplink channel. Further, signal precoding is performed.
在FDD系统中,网络设备侧可以利用FDD部分互易性,将具有互易性的信息发送到导频,终端设备只需要反馈没有互易性的信息(如除角度和时延以外的信息)。网络设备通过上行信道获取的具有互易性的信息,结合终端设备反馈的没有互易性的信息,就能够获取下行信道的完整CSI。In the FDD system, the network device side can use the partial reciprocity of FDD to send reciprocal information to the pilot, and the terminal device only needs to feed back the information without reciprocity (such as information other than angle and delay) . The complete CSI of the downlink channel can be acquired by combining the reciprocal information obtained by the network device through the uplink channel and the non-reciprocal information fed back by the terminal device.
网络设备需要利用上行信道信息估计部分先验信息,包括上行信道的角度和时延信息。网络设备在某个空域基底(S)全集或频域基底(F)全集上投影,得到对应的最佳角度和时延估计值。H UL表示由上行信道测量得到的空频矩阵。 The network device needs to use the uplink channel information to estimate part of the prior information, including the angle and delay information of the uplink channel. The network equipment projects on a certain spatial base (S) ensemble or a frequency domain base (F) ensemble to obtain the corresponding optimal angle and delay estimates. H UL represents the space-frequency matrix obtained by the uplink channel measurement.
H UL可以表示为:H UL=SC ULF HH UL can be expressed as: H UL =SC UL F H .
其中,S对应空域信息,物理上对应网络设备的到达角/出发角。S可以表示一个或多个角度向量构造的矩阵。F对应频域信息,物理上对应到达网络设备的多径信号的多径时延。F可以表示一个或多个时延向量构造的矩阵。C可以表示对应于一个角度向量和一个时延向量的加权系数。C UL表示上行信道对应的系数矩阵。上角标H表示共轭转置,如,F H表示矩阵(或向量)F的共轭转置。 Among them, S corresponds to airspace information, and physically corresponds to the arrival angle/departure angle of the network device. S can represent a matrix constructed from one or more angle vectors. F corresponds to frequency domain information, and physically corresponds to the multipath delay of the multipath signal reaching the network device. F can represent a matrix constructed from one or more delay vectors. C may represent weighting coefficients corresponding to an angle vector and a delay vector. C UL represents the coefficient matrix corresponding to the uplink channel. The superscript H represents the conjugate transpose, for example, F H represents the conjugate transpose of the matrix (or vector) F.
网络设备将角度时延对加载在导频上,终端设备根据接收到的导频信号进行信道测量,得到对应角度时延对的叠加系数。The network device loads the angle-delay pair on the pilot, and the terminal device performs channel measurement according to the received pilot signal to obtain the superposition coefficient of the corresponding angle-delay pair.
网络设备将角度时延对加载在导频上时,可以做时延偏移,但是如果针对多用户,默认统一的时延偏移,即默认不同UE的等效信道统一偏移到某一时延分量,例如,如图2 所示不针对不同用户确定用户特定的时延,而是对所有用户统一偏移到时延域上时延抽头为0的位置,即时延0点上,那么会带来多用户信道状态信息参考信号间(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS)的干扰,降低CSI-RS复用率和CSI-RS开销过大的问题。When the network device loads the angle-delay pair on the pilot, it can do a delay offset, but if it is aimed at multiple users, it defaults to a unified delay offset, that is, the default equivalent channels of different UEs are uniformly offset to a certain delay. For example, as shown in Figure 2, the user-specific delay is not determined for different users, but is uniformly shifted to the position where the delay tap is 0 in the delay domain for all users. The interference between multi-user channel state information-reference signals (CSI-RS) reduces the CSI-RS multiplexing rate and the problems of excessive CSI-RS overhead.
有鉴于此,本申请提出一种方法,利用针对各个UE特定的时延,即UE特定的第一时延,可以降低上下行定时误差造成时延偏差的影响的同时,降低多用户CSI-RS间的干扰,提高CSI-RS复用率和减少CSI-RS开销。In view of this, the present application proposes a method, which can reduce the influence of the delay deviation caused by the uplink and downlink timing errors, and reduce the multi-user CSI-RS by using the specific delay for each UE, that is, the UE-specific first delay. Interference, improve CSI-RS multiplexing rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请提供的各个实施例。以下实施例的描述主要以图1a所示系统为例进行,但不限于此。The various embodiments provided by the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The description of the following embodiments mainly takes the system shown in FIG. 1a as an example, but is not limited thereto.
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种信道测量的方法300的示意性交互图。方法300可以包括如下步骤。FIG. 3 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 300 for channel measurement provided by an embodiment of the present application. Method 300 may include the following steps.
310,终端设备接收预编码参考信号。310. The terminal device receives a precoding reference signal.
相应地,网络设备生成该预编码参考信号,发送该预编码参考信号,所述预编码参考信号对应一个或多个端口,所述端口可以看作是所述预编码参考信号的发送端口。Correspondingly, the network device generates the precoding reference signal, and sends the precoding reference signal, the precoding reference signal corresponds to one or more ports, and the port may be regarded as the port for sending the precoding reference signal.
网络设备可以基于具有互易性的信息对下行参考信号进行预编码,该具有互易性的信息可以基于上行信道测量确定。例如,由于角度和时延具有上下行信道互易性,网络设备可以将基于上行信道测量确定的角度向量和/或时延向量对下行参考信号进行预编码,以便终端设备基于预编码后的参考信号进行信道估计。The network device may precode the downlink reference signal based on information with reciprocity, and the information with reciprocity may be determined based on uplink channel measurement. For example, since the angle and the delay are reciprocal in the uplink and downlink channels, the network device may precode the downlink reference signal based on the angle vector and/or the delay vector determined based on the uplink channel measurement, so that the terminal device can use the precoded reference signal to precode the downlink reference signal. signal for channel estimation.
应理解,其他具有互易性的信息也可以用于本申请实施例。下文主要以角度和/或时延为例进行示例性说明。It should be understood that other information with reciprocity may also be used in the embodiments of the present application. The following mainly takes the angle and/or the time delay as an example for exemplary description.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以将基于上行信道测量确定的角度向量对下行参考信号进行预编码。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the network device may precode the downlink reference signal based on the angle vector determined based on the uplink channel measurement.
以T个时延向量为例。其中,T≥1,且T为整数。在本申请实施例中,每个角度可以通过一个角度向量来表征。每个时延可通过一个时延向量来表征。因此,在本申请实施例中,一个角度向量可以表示一个角度,一个时延向量可以表示一个时延。下文中时延和时延向量有时交替使用,角度和角度向量有时交替使用。Take T delay vectors as an example. where T≥1, and T is an integer. In this embodiment of the present application, each angle may be represented by an angle vector. Each delay can be characterized by a delay vector. Therefore, in this embodiment of the present application, an angle vector may represent an angle, and a delay vector may represent a delay. In the following, delay and delay vector are sometimes used interchangeably, and angle and angle vector are sometimes used interchangeably.
该T个时延向量可以是基于上行信道测量确定的。或者,该T个时延向量也可以不是基于上行信道测量确定的。例如,该T个时延向量可以是预定义的,如协议定义;或者,该T个时延向量可以是基于此前的一次或多次下行信道测量统计确定。本申请对于T个时延向量的获取方式不作限定。The T delay vectors may be determined based on uplink channel measurements. Alternatively, the T delay vectors may not be determined based on uplink channel measurements. For example, the T delay vectors may be predefined, as defined by a protocol; or, the T delay vectors may be statistically determined based on one or more previous downlink channel measurements. The present application does not limit the acquisition manner of the T delay vectors.
关于一个角度向量对应的时延向量的个数,本申请实施例不作限定。The number of delay vectors corresponding to one angle vector is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
例如,在一种可能的设计中,T个时延向量与F个角度向量中的每个角度向量对应。或者说,该F个角度向量中的任意两个角度向量可以对应相同的T个时延向量。For example, in one possible design, T delay vectors correspond to each of the F angle vectors. In other words, any two angle vectors among the F angle vectors may correspond to the same T delay vectors.
又如,在另一种可能的设计中,该T个时延向量中的一个或多个时延向量可对应于F个角度向量中的一个角度向量。或者说,该F个角度向量中,至少两个角度向量对应的时延向量不同。For another example, in another possible design, one or more delay vectors among the T delay vectors may correspond to one angle vector among the F angle vectors. In other words, among the F angle vectors, delay vectors corresponding to at least two angle vectors are different.
下文以F个角度向量为例示例性说明。其中,F≥1,且F为整数。The following takes F angle vectors as an example for illustration. Among them, F≥1, and F is an integer.
可选地,该预编码参考信号是基于F个角度向量对参考信号预编码得到。Optionally, the precoding reference signal is obtained by precoding the reference signal based on the F angle vectors.
网络设备可以基于预先确定的F个角度向量中的每个角度向量,对参考信号进行预编 码,如CSI-RS,以得到对应于F个端口的预编码参考信号。每个端口的预编码参考信号可以是基于该F个角度向量中的一个角度向量预编码得到。The network device may precode a reference signal, such as a CSI-RS, based on each of the predetermined F angle vectors, to obtain precoded reference signals corresponding to the F ports. The precoding reference signal of each port may be obtained by precoding based on one angle vector among the F angle vectors.
由于角度具有上下行信道互易性,该F个角度向量可以基于上行信道测量确定。网络设备可以根据预先估计得到的上行信道矩阵,确定较强的F个角度。该F个角度可以通过F个角度向量来表征。Since the angle has the reciprocity of the uplink and downlink channels, the F angle vectors can be determined based on the uplink channel measurement. The network device may determine F stronger angles according to the uplink channel matrix obtained by pre-estimation. The F angles can be characterized by F angle vectors.
该F个角度向量例如可以取自预先定义的角度向量集合。可选地,该角度向量集合中的各角度向量取自(过采样)DFT矩阵。可选地,该角度向量集合中的各角度向量为导向矢量。The F angle vectors may, for example, be taken from a predefined set of angle vectors. Optionally, each angle vector in the set of angle vectors is taken from an (oversampled) DFT matrix. Optionally, each angle vector in the angle vector set is a steering vector.
网络设备例如可以利用现有技术中的角度和时延联合估计(joint angle and delay estimation,JADE)算法来确定该F个角度向量。具体地,该估计算法例如可以是多重信号分类算法(multiple signal classification algorithm,MUSIC)、巴特利特(Bartlett)算法或旋转不变子空间算法(estimation of signal parameters via rotation invariant technique algorithm,ESPRIT)等。网络设备也可以通过对基于上行信道测量确定的空频矩阵进行(过采样)DFT来确定F个角度向量。本申请对于网络设备确定该F个角度向量的具体方法不作限定。The network device may determine the F angle vectors by using, for example, a joint angle and delay estimation (joint angle and delay estimation, JADE) algorithm in the prior art. Specifically, the estimation algorithm can be, for example, a multiple signal classification algorithm (multiple signal classification algorithm, MUSIC), a Bartlett algorithm or a rotation invariant subspace algorithm (estimation of signal parameters via rotation invariant technique algorithm, ESPRIT), etc. . The network device may also determine the F angle vectors by performing (oversampling) DFT on the space-frequency matrix determined based on the uplink channel measurements. The present application does not limit the specific method for the network device to determine the F angle vectors.
应理解,该F个角度向量也并不一定基于上行信道测量确定。例如,该F个角度向量可以是预定义的,如协议定义;或者,该F个角度向量可以是基于此前的一次或多次下行信道测量而反馈的结果统计确定。本申请对于F个角度向量的确定方式不作限定。It should be understood that the F angle vectors are not necessarily determined based on uplink channel measurements. For example, the F angle vectors may be predefined, as defined in a protocol; or, the F angle vectors may be statistically determined based on results fed back by one or more previous downlink channel measurements. The present application does not limit the manner of determining the F angle vectors.
下文重点从本申请时延向量处理的角度进行介绍,关于角度向量的处理,本申请不再详细描述。The following will focus on the introduction from the perspective of the processing of the delay vector in the present application, and the processing of the angle vector will not be described in detail in the present application.
320,终端设备基于所述预编码参考信号和所述终端设备特定的第一时延,进行信道测量,获得各个所述端口对应的叠加系数。320. The terminal device performs channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and the first time delay specific to the terminal device, and obtains a superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports.
所述终端设备特定的第一时延,可以由网络设备指示给终端设备,可以由终端设备基于网络设备的指示在预定时延范围内而确定,也可以由终端设备进行时延调节量估计所获得,可选的,可以由终端设备联合各个端口(可以说联合所有端口)或联合部分端口进行时延调节量估计所获得。无论通过什么方式获得,所述第一时延为针对该终端设备特定的时延,也可以说该终端设备专属的时延。应理解,“各个所述端口对应的叠加系数”包括各个所述端口对应的所有叠加系数或部分叠加系数。假如有8个端口,每个端口对应的所有叠加系数有4个,那么各个所述端口对应的所有叠加系数总共有32个(8乘以4),“各个所述端口对应的叠加系数”可以是这所有的32个叠加系数,也可以是其中部分的叠加系数(如终端设备根据预设规则选择出的叠加系数),例如,针对每个端口均选择相同数量的叠加系数,或者针对每个端口按照预设规则选择叠加系数,针对端口1选择满足预定条件的叠加系数有3个,针对端口2选择满足预定条件的叠加系数有4个,针对端口3选择满足预定条件的叠加系数有2个,针对端口4选择满足预定条件的叠加系数有0个,等等。还应理解,如果“各个所述端口对应的叠加系数”为各个所述端口对应的部分叠加系数,不排除终端设备还获得了各个所述端口对应的所有叠加系数,应理解320中“获得”针对终端设备的反馈信息(下述第一指示信息所指示的内容)而言,但不排除获得其他信息。The specific first delay of the terminal equipment may be indicated to the terminal equipment by the network equipment, may be determined by the terminal equipment within a predetermined delay range based on the indication of the network equipment, or may be determined by the terminal equipment through the estimation of the delay adjustment amount. Obtained, optionally, can be obtained by the terminal equipment in conjunction with each port (it can be said to be in conjunction with all ports) or in conjunction with some ports to estimate the delay adjustment amount. No matter how it is obtained, the first delay is a delay specific to the terminal device, or can also be said to be a delay dedicated to the terminal device. It should be understood that "the superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports" includes all superposition coefficients or part of the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the ports. If there are 8 ports and all the superposition coefficients corresponding to each port are 4, then all the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the ports have a total of 32 (8 times 4), and the "superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports" can be It is all the 32 superposition coefficients, and it can also be a part of the superposition coefficients (such as the superposition coefficients selected by the terminal device according to the preset rules), for example, the same number of superposition coefficients are selected for each port, or for each port. The port selects the superposition coefficients according to the preset rules. For port 1, there are 3 superposition coefficients that meet the predetermined conditions. For port 2, there are 4 superposition coefficients that meet the predetermined conditions. For port 3, there are 2 superposition coefficients that meet the predetermined conditions. , select 0 superposition coefficients that satisfy the predetermined condition for port 4, and so on. It should also be understood that if "the superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports" is a partial superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports, it is not excluded that the terminal device also obtained all the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the ports, and it should be understood that "obtain" in 320 For the feedback information of the terminal device (the content indicated by the first indication information below), it is not excluded to obtain other information.
可以理解,终端设备基于所述终端设备特定的第一时延,可以直接基于该第一时延, 也可以间接基于该第一时延,例如基于与该第一时延关联的信息(通过所述第一时延能够得到该关联的信息),例如,所述第一时延对应的(过采样)DFT频域向量(如下文中的w q和/或w′ q)。 It can be understood that, based on the specific first delay of the terminal device, the terminal device may be directly based on the first delay, or may be indirectly based on the first delay, for example, based on information associated with the first delay (through the The associated information can be obtained from the first delay), for example, the (oversampled) DFT frequency-domain vector corresponding to the first delay (eg, w q and/or w′ q in the following).
下文实施例中将根据第一时延不同的获取方式下的信道测量,分别进行描述。In the following embodiments, channel measurements in different acquisition modes of the first delay will be described respectively.
330,终端设备发送第一指示信息。330. The terminal device sends the first indication information.
相应的网络设备接收所述第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述叠加系数。The corresponding network device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficient.
所述第一指示信息可以直接携带所述叠加系数,也可以携带所述叠加系数关联的参数,或者是所述叠加系数的变形形式等,总而言之,所述第一指示信息能够直接或间接指示所述叠加系数。可以理解,所述第一指示信息可以通过一条或多条信令下发,本申请对此不做限制。The first indication information may directly carry the superposition coefficient, or may carry a parameter associated with the superposition coefficient, or a deformation form of the superposition coefficient, etc. In a word, the first indication information can directly or indirectly indicate the the superposition factor. It can be understood that the first indication information may be delivered through one or more signalings, which is not limited in this application.
所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,应理解,本申请中所有提及“各个端口”的描述,都是想强调所有端口中的每一个端口都要被考虑,“各个端口对应的叠加系数”也就是说所有端口中考虑每一个端口对应的叠加系数,即各端口对应的叠加系数的合集。那么“各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本”可以理解为“所有端口中每一个端口对应的叠加系数一起用于确定第一码本”;例如有P个端口,每一个端口对应的叠加系数(可以是每一个端口对应的所有叠加系数,或对应的部分叠加系数)均为L’个,那么用于确定第一码本的叠加系数就有PL’个,其中,P、L’均为大于或等于1的整数,PL’表示P乘以L’。The superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports are used to determine the first codebook. It should be understood that all the descriptions referring to "each port" in this application are intended to emphasize that each port in all ports must be considered, "each port" should be considered. The superposition coefficient corresponding to the port" means that the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is considered in all ports, that is, the collection of superposition coefficients corresponding to each port. Then "the superposition coefficients corresponding to each port are used to determine the first codebook" can be understood as "the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of all the ports are used to determine the first codebook together"; for example, there are P ports, and each port corresponds to The superposition coefficients (which can be all the superposition coefficients corresponding to each port, or the corresponding partial superposition coefficients) are L', then there are PL' superposition coefficients used to determine the first codebook, where P, L ' is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and PL' means P multiplied by L'.
所述第一码本满足
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000014
也就是说第一码本的结构可以直接是
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000015
也可以是其他形式,只要满足
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000016
即可(例如,第一码本结构可以是W=W 1W 2W′ f H,其中W′ f=QW f,也就是第一码本满足
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000017
)。其中W 1为所述端口的端口选择矩阵,W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵(记为情况一),或者W 2可以为所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵(记为情况二),W f是频率分量矩阵(也可以称为频域基向量矩阵),
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000018
表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。下文实施例中将根据第一时延不同的获取方式下的信道测量,对该码本结构分别进行描述。
The first codebook satisfies
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000014
That is to say, the structure of the first codebook can be directly
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000015
It can also be in other forms, as long as it meets the
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000016
That’s enough (for example, the first codebook structure may be W=W 1 W 2 W′ f H , where W′ f =QW f , that is, the first codebook satisfies
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000017
). Wherein W 1 is the port selection matrix of the port, W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports (denoted as case 1), or W 2 can be the superposition coefficient of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports matrix (denoted as case 2), W f is the frequency component matrix (also known as frequency domain basis vector matrix),
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000018
represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q. In the following embodiments, the codebook structure will be described respectively according to the channel measurement in different acquisition modes of the first delay.
上述端口选择矩阵W 1可以是任一种类型的端口选择矩阵(包括现有的端口选择矩阵类型和未来可能的端口选择矩阵类型,本申请对此不做限制),能够用于指示端口选择的信息。例如,对于双极化天线,W 1维度可以为P*2L 0,W 1用于从P个CSI-RS端口中选择2L 0个端口,L 0的含义为一个极化方向选择的CSI-RS端口(空域向量)的数量,P的含义为CSI-RS的端口数目。L 0和P的值可以是网络侧通过RCC、MAC CE、DCI信令中的一种或几种配置的,也可以是协议约定的。此外,如果端口被划分为端口组,还可以从端口组的角度解读W 1实现对应端口的选择,例如对于双极化天线,W 1维度可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000020
表示一个极化方向的CSI-RS端口组的个数,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000021
表示一个极化方向选择的CSI-RS端口组的个数。假设
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000022
如果从端口角度解读,这里W 1中每一列元素代表一个端口组,其中取值为1的元素表示选择对应的CSI-RS端口,根据该W 1表示2个CSI-RS端口组中,选择第一组中的第一个CSI-RS端口,和第二组中的第三个CSI-RS端口。如果从端口组角度解读,这里W 1中每一行元素代表一个端口组,其中取值为1的 元素表示选择对应的CSI-RS端口组,根据该W 1表示4个CSI-RS端口组中,选择第一个CSI-RS端口组,和第三个CSI-RS端口组。
The above - mentioned port selection matrix W1 can be any type of port selection matrix (including existing port selection matrix types and possible future port selection matrix types, which is not limited in this application), and can be used to indicate the port selection matrix. information. For example, for a dual-polarized antenna, the dimension of W 1 can be P*2L 0 , W 1 is used to select 2L 0 ports from P CSI-RS ports, and L 0 means CSI-RS selected in one polarization direction The number of ports (spatial vector), where P means the number of ports of the CSI-RS. The values of L 0 and P may be configured by the network side through one or more of RCC, MAC CE, and DCI signaling, or may be agreed by the protocol. In addition, if ports are divided into port groups, W1 can also be interpreted from the perspective of port groups to realize the selection of corresponding ports. For example, for a dual - polarized antenna, the dimension of W1 can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000020
represents the number of CSI-RS port groups in one polarization direction,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000021
Indicates the number of CSI-RS port groups selected for one polarization direction. Assumption
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000022
If interpreted from the perspective of ports, each column of elements in W 1 represents a port group, and an element with a value of 1 indicates that the corresponding CSI-RS port is selected. According to this W 1 indicates that among the two CSI-RS port groups, select the first The first CSI-RS port in one group, and the third CSI-RS port in the second group. If interpreted from the perspective of port groups, each row of elements in W 1 represents a port group, and the element with a value of 1 indicates that the corresponding CSI-RS port group is selected. According to the W 1 , it indicates that among the four CSI-RS port groups, Select the first CSI-RS port group, and the third CSI-RS port group.
W f也可以是任一种类型的频域分量矩阵(包括现有的频域分量矩阵类型和未来可能的频域分量矩阵类型,本申请对此不做限制),W f可以包括一个或多个特定的列向量(也可称为基向量),对于包括一个列向量的,列向量的长度可以为N f×1,N f为频率单元的数目,可等于CSI-RS发送带宽的RB数目或子带数目,也可能是RB或子带数目的函数,还可能是网络侧通知或协议约定。例如,网络侧可通过信令限制W f为(过采样)DFT的特定K列,K列表示K个特定的频率分量位置。 W f can also be any type of frequency domain component matrix (including existing frequency domain component matrix types and possible future frequency domain component matrix types, which is not limited in this application), and W f can include one or more A specific column vector (also referred to as a basis vector), for a column vector including a column vector, the length of the column vector can be N f × 1, where N f is the number of frequency units, which can be equal to the number of RBs in the CSI-RS transmission bandwidth Or the number of subbands, or it may be a function of the number of RBs or subbands, or it may be notified by the network side or a protocol agreement. For example, the network side can restrict W f to be a specific K column of the (oversampling) DFT through signaling, where the K column represents K specific frequency component positions.
可以理解,上述端口选择矩阵W 1可以没有,所选择的端口,可以通过其他形式,例如比特图(bitmap)的形式,由终端设备指示给网络设备,因此所述第一码本可以满足
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000023
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000024
和Q H参见上述解释,W 2可以同上述解释,仍为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵(情况一),即结合bitmap的指示和W 2,能够知道所有端口中选择了哪些端口、以及被选择的端口对应的叠加系数;或者W 2可以为所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵(情况二),即结合bitmap的指示和W 2,能够知道所有端口中选择了哪些端口、以及被选择的端口对应的叠加系数。
It can be understood that the above - mentioned port selection matrix W1 may not be available, and the selected ports may be indicated by the terminal device to the network device in other forms, such as the form of a bitmap, so the first codebook can satisfy
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000023
in,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000024
and Q H refer to the above explanation, W 2 can be the same as the above explanation, and is still the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports (case 1), that is, combined with the bitmap indication and W 2 , we can know which ports are selected from all ports port, and the superposition coefficient corresponding to the selected port; or W 2 can be the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficient corresponding to the selected port (case 2), that is, combined with the bitmap indication and W 2 , it can be known that all ports have selected which ports, and the superposition factor corresponding to the selected port.
需要说明的是,对于情况一,W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,只是说明了W 2的结构大小(或者说W 2中矩阵元素的数量)考虑了各个端口(也就是说考虑了所有端口的端口数),例如W 2的行数即为所有端口的端口数。但是这并不意味着W 2的信息内容(W 2中矩阵元素所指示的内容)包括所有端口中每一端口对应的叠加系数,例如,有的端口未被选择,其对应的W 2中的矩阵元素上的值可能为0,只有被选择了的端口在W 2中的对应矩阵元素上才有其对应的叠加系数。同样,对于情况二,W 2为所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,只是说明了W 2的结构大小(或者说W 2中矩阵元素的数量)是考虑了被选择的端口(也就是说考虑了所选的端口的端口数),例如W 2的行数即为所选的端口的端口数。可见,情况二相对于情况一,矩阵大小可能更小。 It should be noted that, for case 1, W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, and it only illustrates the structure size of W 2 (or the number of matrix elements in W 2 ) considering each port (also That is to say, the number of ports of all ports is considered), for example, the number of lines of W 2 is the number of ports of all ports. But this does not mean that the information content of W 2 (the content indicated by the matrix elements in W 2 ) includes the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port in all ports. For example, if some ports are not selected, the corresponding ones in W 2 The value on the matrix element may be 0, and only the selected port has its corresponding superposition coefficient on the corresponding matrix element in W2. Similarly, for the second case, W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports, but it just shows that the structure size of W 2 (or the number of matrix elements in W 2 ) is taken into consideration of the selected ports (also That is to say, the port number of the selected port is considered), for example, the number of lines of W 2 is the port number of the selected port. It can be seen that the size of the matrix may be smaller in case 2 than in case 1.
340,终端设备发送第三指示信息。340. The terminal device sends third indication information.
340为可选的步骤,相应的网络设备接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口选择矩阵W 1。对端口选择矩阵W 1的指示,可以是直接指示或间接指示。可选的,所述第三指示信息可以和所述第一指示信息通过一条消息发送或分别通过不同消息发送。 Step 340 is an optional step, and the corresponding network device receives third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the port selection matrix W 1 . The indication to the port selection matrix W1 may be a direct indication or an indirect indication. Optionally, the third indication information and the first indication information may be sent through one message or separately sent through different messages.
通过本申请实施例,能够利用针对各个UE特定的时延进行信道测量,可以降低上下行定时误差造成时延偏差的影响的同时,降低多用户CSI-RS间的干扰,提高CSI-RS复用率和减少CSI-RS开销。Through the embodiments of the present application, the channel measurement can be performed using the specific time delay for each UE, which can reduce the influence of the time delay deviation caused by the uplink and downlink timing errors, reduce the interference between multi-user CSI-RS, and improve the CSI-RS multiplexing. rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
图4是本申请另一实施例提供的种信道测量的方法400的示意性交互图。本实施例与图3所示实施例的区别在于,本实施例中所述第一时延的获取方式是由网络设备指示给终端设备的,方法400可以包括如下步骤。FIG. 4 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 400 for channel measurement provided by another embodiment of the present application. The difference between this embodiment and the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 is that the method for obtaining the first delay in this embodiment is indicated by the network device to the terminal device, and the method 400 may include the following steps.
410,终端设备接收预编码参考信号。410. The terminal device receives a precoding reference signal.
410与上述310类似,参见310的描述,在此不再赘述。410 is similar to the above-mentioned 310, and reference is made to the description of 310, and details are not repeated here.
420,终端设备接收第二指示信息。420. The terminal device receives the second indication information.
相应地,网络设备生成该第二指示信息,发送该第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示针对终端设备特定的第二时延。本实施例中,所述第二时延就是所述第一时延。Correspondingly, the network device generates the second indication information, and sends the second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second delay specific to the terminal device. In this embodiment, the second delay is the first delay.
可选的,所述第二指示信息可以直接携带所述第二时延,也可以携带所述第二时延关联的参数,或者是所述第二时延的变形形式等,总而言之,所述第二指示信息能够直接或间接指示所述第二时延。可以理解,所述第二指示信息可以通过一条或多条信令下发,本申请对此不做限制。应理解,410和420无必然的先后顺序。Optionally, the second indication information may directly carry the second delay, or may carry parameters associated with the second delay, or be a variant of the second delay, etc. In a word, the The second indication information can directly or indirectly indicate the second delay. It can be understood that the second indication information may be issued through one or more pieces of signaling, which is not limited in this application. It should be understood that 410 and 420 are not necessarily in order.
430,终端设备根据所述第二指示信息确定所述终端设备特定的第一时延,并基于所述预编码参考信号和所述终第一时延,进行信道测量,获得各个所述端口对应的叠加系数。430. The terminal device determines the specific first delay of the terminal device according to the second indication information, and performs channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and the final first delay, and obtains the corresponding port corresponding to each port. the superposition factor.
针对所述第二指示信息直接或间接的指示手段,具体可以是:The direct or indirect indication means for the second indication information may specifically be:
手段(1):所述第二指示信息直接指示所述第二时延(记为τ *) Means (1): the second indication information directly indicates the second delay (denoted as τ * )
需要说明的是,这里的τ *是量化后的时延信息。网络设备从上行信道估计得到针对第i条径(或者说第i个端口)的角度时延信息(θ ii),θ i为角度信息,τ i为时延信息,并通过预编码将角度和预偏置后时延(θ ii*)加载到导频上,利用导频估计出等效信道,假设子带数目为K(即用来发送CSI-RS的子带的数目),网络设备端发送天线数为M(UE可以不用感知该M),UE端接收天线数为N,端口数为P,所述K,M,N,P皆为整数,K和P可以由网络设备指示给UE,第n(1≤n≤N)个UE天线上的等效信道可以表示为: It should be noted that τ * here is the quantized delay information. The network device estimates the angular delay information (θ i , τ i ) for the i-th path (or the i-th port) from the uplink channel estimation, where θ i is the angle information, and τ i is the delay information. Load the angle and pre-bias post-delay (θ ii* ) onto the pilot, and use the pilot to estimate the equivalent channel, assuming that the number of subbands is K (that is, the number of subbands used to transmit CSI-RS number of bands), the number of transmitting antennas on the network device side is M (the UE may not need to perceive the M), the number of receiving antennas on the UE side is N, the number of ports is P, the K, M, N, and P are all integers, and K and P can be indicated to the UE by the network device, and the equivalent channel on the nth (1≤n≤N) UE antenna can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000025
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000026
表示P行K列的复数域,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000027
表示UE第n个接收天线上,第k个子带上的下行信道,其中dl表示下行,n=1,2,……,N,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000028
表示网络设备第p个端口,第k个子带上的预编码权值向量。其中,k=1,2,……,K;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000029
表示M行1列的复数域;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000030
的元素
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000031
表示UE在第n个接收天线上,第p(p=1,2,……,P)个端口,第k个子带上估计得到的等效信道,其中eq表示等效。
in,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000026
represents the field of complex numbers with P rows and K columns,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000027
Represents the downlink channel on the kth subband on the nth receiving antenna of the UE, where dl represents the downlink, n=1, 2,...,N,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000028
Indicates the precoding weight vector on the pth port and the kth subband of the network device. Among them, k=1,2,...,K;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000029
Represents a complex number field with M rows and 1 column;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000030
Elements
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000031
Represents the equivalent channel estimated by the UE on the nth receiving antenna, the pth (p=1, 2, ..., P) port and the kth subband, where eq represents equivalent.
UE基于特定的时延τ *进行信道估计,得到等效信道,记为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000032
(其中
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000033
为未考虑τ *得到的等效信道):
The UE performs channel estimation based on a specific delay τ * to obtain an equivalent channel, denoted as
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000032
(in
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000033
is the equivalent channel obtained without considering τ * ):
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000034
Q是用来利用τ *进行信道估计的对角阵,满足如下形式: Q is a diagonal matrix used for channel estimation using τ * , which satisfies the following form:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000035
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000035
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000036
表示K行K列的复数域,该对角阵的对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000037
f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数。
in,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000036
Represents a field of complex numbers with K rows and K columns, and the elements on the diagonal of this diagonal matrix are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000037
f k represents the frequency of the k-th subband, k=1, 2, ..., K, where K is the number of subbands.
UE按如下方式计算UE第n个接收天线对应的PL个叠加系数(PL表示P乘以L,PL个叠加系数为P个端口中各个端口对应的叠加系数的总和,其中每个端口对应的叠加系数可以为L个):The UE calculates the PL superposition coefficients corresponding to the nth receiving antenna of the UE as follows (PL represents P multiplied by L, and the PL superposition coefficients are the sum of the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the P ports, where the superposition corresponding to each port is The coefficients can be L):
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000038
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000039
表示PL行1列的复数域,vec(A)表示将矩阵A按列展开为列向量,L是频域分量矩阵W f的列数,W f可以是网络设备指示给UE的,或者由协议预定义。所述c n即为UE第n个接收天线对应的各个端口对应的叠加系数。
in,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000039
Represents a complex number domain with PL row and 1 column, vec(A) means to expand the matrix A into a column vector, L is the number of columns of the frequency domain component matrix W f , W f can be indicated to the UE by the network device, or by the protocol Predefined. The cn is the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port corresponding to the nth receiving antenna of the UE.
从而获得针对UE第n个接收天线,各个端口对应的叠加系数c nThus, the superposition coefficient cn corresponding to each port for the nth receiving antenna of the UE is obtained.
手段(2):所述第二指示信息通过指示其他信息间接指示所述第二时延Means (2): the second indication information indirectly indicates the second delay by indicating other information
假设子带数目为K,网络设备发送天线数为M,UE端接收天线数为N,端口数为P。网络设备下发信令,指示UE在特定的频域分量w q(与所述τ *相关,相当于间接指示τ *)上反馈路径系数(可选的可以指示(过采样)DFT码本的索引(index),相当于指示了O和o的相关信息,可选的,O和o可以一起指示给UE,也可以通过不同消息分别指示给UE,还可以指示o/O的比值;其中O是(过采样)DFT码本的列数,o=0,1,...,O-1),可以理解O与τ *相关联; It is assumed that the number of subbands is K, the number of transmitting antennas of the network device is M, the number of receiving antennas at the UE side is N, and the number of ports is P. The network device sends signaling to instruct the UE to feed back the path coefficients (optionally, it can indicate (oversampling) the value of the DFT codebook) on the specific frequency domain component w q (related to the τ * , which is equivalent to the indirect indication τ * ). The index (index) is equivalent to indicating the related information of 0 and o. Optionally, 0 and o can be indicated to the UE together, or can be indicated to the UE through different messages, and the ratio of o/0 can also be indicated; where 0 is the number of columns of the (oversampling) DFT codebook, o=0,1,...,O-1), it can be understood that O is associated with τ * ;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000040
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000040
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000041
表示K行1列的复数域,o=0,1,...,O-1,O为(过采样)DFT码本的列数,w q的列向量元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000042
K为子带的个数;网络设备可以将o和O的相关信息下发给UE。
in,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000041
Represents a complex number field with K rows and 1 column, o=0,1,...,O-1, O is the number of columns of the (oversampling) DFT codebook, and the column vector elements of w q are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000042
K is the number of subbands; the network device can deliver the relevant information of o and 0 to the UE.
网络设备从上行信道估计得到角度时延信息(θ ii)加载到导频上后,并进行
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000043
的预偏移,其中
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000044
是w q的共轭。
The network equipment obtains the angle delay information (θ ii ) from the uplink channel estimation and loads it on the pilot frequency, and performs
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000043
pre-offset, where
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000044
is the conjugate of w q .
UE利用导频估计出等效信道,UE第n(n=1,2,......,N)个天线上的等效信道可以表示为:The UE uses the pilot to estimate the equivalent channel, and the equivalent channel on the nth (n=1, 2, ..., N) antenna of the UE can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000045
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000045
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000046
表示P行K列的复数域,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000047
表示UE第n个接收天线上,第k个子带上的下行信道,其中dl表示下行,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000048
表示网络设备第p个端口,第k个子带上的预编码权值向量。其中,k=1,2,……,K;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000049
表示M行1列的复数域;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000050
的元素
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000051
表示UE在第n个接收天线上,第p(p=1,2,……,P)个端口,第k个子带估计得到的等效信道,其中eq表示等效。
in,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000046
represents the field of complex numbers with P rows and K columns,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000047
Represents the downlink channel on the kth subband on the nth receiving antenna of the UE, where dl represents the downlink,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000048
Indicates the precoding weight vector on the pth port and the kth subband of the network device. Among them, k=1,2,...,K;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000049
Represents a complex number field with M rows and 1 column;
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000050
Elements
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000051
Indicates the equivalent channel estimated by the UE on the nth receiving antenna, the pth (p=1, 2, ..., P) port and the kth subband, where eq represents equivalent.
UE基于w q进行信道估计后,得到等效信道,记为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000052
(其中
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000053
为未考虑w q得到的等效信道):
After the UE performs channel estimation based on w q , the equivalent channel is obtained, which is denoted as
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000052
(in
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000053
is the equivalent channel obtained without considering w q ):
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000054
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000054
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000055
是用来利用w q进行信道估计的对角阵,满足如下形式,由网络设备指示的o和O的相关信息决定:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000055
is a diagonal matrix used for channel estimation using w q , which satisfies the following form and is determined by the relevant information of o and o indicated by the network device:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000056
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000056
其中,w q(k)表示w q的第k个元素,该对角阵的对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000057
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000058
K为子带的个数,o=0,1,...,O-1。
Among them, w q (k) represents the k-th element of w q , and the elements on the diagonal of this diagonal matrix are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000057
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000058
K is the number of subbands, o=0,1,...,O-1.
UE按如下方式计算UE第n个接收天线对应的PL个叠加系数(PL表示P乘以L,PL个叠加系数为P个端口中各个端口对应的叠加系数的总和,其中每个端口对应的叠加系数可以为L个):The UE calculates the PL superposition coefficients corresponding to the nth receiving antenna of the UE as follows (PL represents P multiplied by L, and the PL superposition coefficients are the sum of the superposition coefficients corresponding to each of the P ports, where the superposition corresponding to each port is The coefficients can be L):
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000059
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000059
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000060
表示PL行1列的复数域,vec(A)表示将矩阵A按列展开为列向量,L是频域分量矩阵W f的列数,W f可以是网络设备指示给UE的,或者由协议预定义。所述c n即为UE第n个接收天线对应的各个端口对应的叠加系数。
in,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000060
Represents a complex number domain with PL row and 1 column, vec(A) means to expand the matrix A into a column vector, L is the number of columns of the frequency domain component matrix W f , W f can be indicated to the UE by the network device, or by the protocol Predefined. The cn is the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port corresponding to the nth receiving antenna of the UE.
从而获得针对UE第n个接收天线,各个端口对应的叠加系数c nThus, the superposition coefficient cn corresponding to each port for the nth receiving antenna of the UE is obtained.
440,终端设备发送第一指示信息。440. The terminal device sends the first indication information.
相应的,网络设备接收所述第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述各个端口对应的叠加系数。440与330类似,相同内容可参见330的描述,在此不再赘述。Correspondingly, the network device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports. 440 is similar to 330. For the same content, reference may be made to the description of 330, and details are not repeated here.
针对一个接收天线,UE上报反馈系数可以根据网络设备指示或者自行从P×L个系数中选择部分系数上报,系数选择性上报功能可以通过上报比特位图(bitmap)实现,或其他指示方式实现,下文为描述简单,假设UE从PL个系数中挑选P′个系数进行反馈,其中P′大于或等于1,小于或等于PL,也就是说可以反馈各个端口对应的全部或部分叠加系数,特此说明。For one receiving antenna, the UE can report the feedback coefficients according to the instructions of the network device or select some coefficients from P×L coefficients for reporting. The following is a simple description. It is assumed that the UE selects P' coefficients from the PL coefficients for feedback, where P' is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to PL, that is to say, all or part of the superposition coefficients corresponding to each port can be fed back, which is hereby explained. .
针对UE所有接收天线反馈的方式:Feedback methods for all receiving antennas of the UE:
如果针对UE所有接收天线,那么有N个c n要反馈,假设针对每个接收天线都是在PL个系数中选取相同个数的P′个系数进行反馈(当然也可以针对不同接收天线,选取不同个数的系数进行反馈),反馈所有接收天线对应的系数
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000061
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000062
表示N行P’列的复数域。其中,c n为第n(n=1,2,……,N)个UE天线对应的各个端口对应的叠加系数,[c 1 ... c N] T表示[c 1 ... c N]的转置。
If for all the receiving antennas of the UE, there are N cn to be fed back. It is assumed that for each receiving antenna, the same number of P' coefficients are selected from the PL coefficients for feedback (of course, it can also be selected for different receiving antennas. different numbers of coefficients for feedback), feedback the coefficients corresponding to all receiving antennas
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000061
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000062
A complex number field representing N rows and P' columns. Among them, c n is the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port corresponding to the nth (n=1, 2, ..., N) UE antenna, and [c 1 ... c N ] T represents [c 1 ... c N ] transpose.
针对秩(Rank)反馈的方式:Feedback for Rank:
对所有接收天线上的系数C=[c 1 ... c N] T作奇异值(singular value decomposition,SVD)分解,反馈秩指示(rank indicator,RI)所对应的所有Rank的等效系数,共RP’个的等效系数,其中R为Rank数,R小于或等于N。 Perform singular value decomposition (SVD) decomposition on the coefficients C=[c 1 ... c N ] T on all receiving antennas, and feed back the equivalent coefficients of all Ranks corresponding to the rank indicator (RI), A total of RP' equivalent coefficients, where R is the Rank number, and R is less than or equal to N.
可以理解,UE采用何种反馈方式,并不限制,可以是现有技术中的反馈方式。It can be understood that there is no limitation on which feedback manner the UE adopts, and may be the feedback manner in the prior art.
与图3的实施例类似,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足:Similar to the embodiment in FIG. 3 , the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports are used to determine the first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000063
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000063
或者,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000064
or,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000064
具体描述,参见图3的实施例,在此不再赘述。For a specific description, refer to the embodiment in FIG. 3 , which will not be repeated here.
应理解,以上第一码本满足的公式是从一根接收天线的角度来看,考虑对应一根接收天线的所有端口中各端口对应的叠加系数的合集,W 2有1个;如果针对多根接收天线,W 2有N个或者可以是N个W 2的等效变形。 It should be understood that the above formula satisfied by the first codebook is from the perspective of one receiving antenna, considering the collection of superposition coefficients corresponding to each port in all ports corresponding to one receiving antenna, there is one W 2 ; The root receive antenna, W2 has N or can be an equivalent variant of N W2 .
示例性的,可选的,其中对于双极化天线,W 1维度可以为P*2L 0,W 1用于从P个CSI-RS端口中选择2L 0个端口,L 0的含义为一个极化方向选择的CSI-RS端口(空域向量)的数量, P的含义为CSI-RS的端口数目。W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,或者W 2可以为所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,W f是频率分量矩阵(也可以称为频域基向量矩阵),W f可以包括一个或多个特定的列向量(也可称为基向量),网络侧可通过信令限制W f为DFT或者过采样DFT的特定K列,K列表示K个特定的频率分量位置。 Exemplary, optional, wherein for a dual-polarized antenna, the dimension of W 1 may be P*2L 0 , W 1 is used to select 2L 0 ports from the P CSI-RS ports, and L 0 means a polar is the number of CSI-RS ports (spatial vector) selected in the direction of LD, and the meaning of P is the number of CSI-RS ports. W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, or W 2 may be the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports, and W f is the frequency component matrix (also referred to as the frequency domain basis vector matrix ), W f can include one or more specific column vectors (also called basis vectors), the network side can restrict W f to be a specific K column of DFT or oversampling DFT through signaling, and K column represents K specific frequency component location.
对于430中的手段(1),Q是如下形式的对角阵(具体解释参见上文,在此不再赘述):For means (1) in 430, Q is a diagonal matrix of the following form (see above for a detailed explanation, and will not be repeated here):
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000065
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000065
对于430中的手段(2),Q是如下形式的对角阵(具体解释参见上文,在此不再赘述):For means (2) in 430, Q is a diagonal matrix of the following form (see above for a detailed explanation, and will not be repeated here):
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000066
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000066
450,终端设备发送第三指示信息。450. The terminal device sends third indication information.
450为可选的步骤,相应的网络设备接收所述第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口选择矩阵W 1。对端口选择矩阵W 1的指示,可以是直接指示或间接指示。可选的,所述第三指示信息可以和所述第一指示信息通过一条消息发送或分别通过不同消息发送。 Step 450 is an optional step, and the corresponding network device receives the third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the port selection matrix W 1 . The indication to the port selection matrix W1 may be a direct indication or an indirect indication. Optionally, the third indication information and the first indication information may be sent through one message or separately sent through different messages.
通过本申请实施例,能够基于网络设备的指示,利用针对各个UE特定的时延进行信道测量,可以降低上下行定时误差造成时延偏差的影响的同时,降低多用户CSI-RS间的干扰,提高CSI-RS复用率和减少CSI-RS开销。Through the embodiments of the present application, it is possible to perform channel measurement by using the specific time delay for each UE based on the indication of the network device, which can reduce the influence of the time delay deviation caused by the uplink and downlink timing errors, and also reduce the interference between multi-user CSI-RS. Improve CSI-RS multiplexing rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
图5是本申请又一实施例提供的信道测量的方法500的示意性交互图。本实施例与图4所示实施例的区别在于,本实施例中所述第一时延的获取方式是UE进行时延估计获得的(网络设备可以施加了时延偏移,也可以没有施加时延偏移),方法500可以包括如下步骤。FIG. 5 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 500 for channel measurement provided by another embodiment of the present application. The difference between this embodiment and the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 is that the method for obtaining the first delay in this embodiment is obtained by the UE performing delay estimation (the network device may impose a delay offset, or it may not impose a delay offset). time delay offset), the method 500 may include the following steps.
510,终端设备接收预编码参考信号。510. The terminal device receives a precoding reference signal.
510与上述310、410类似,参见310、410的描述,在此不再赘述。510 is similar to the above-mentioned 310 and 410. Refer to the description of 310 and 410, and details are not repeated here.
520,终端设备接收第二指示信息。520. The terminal device receives the second indication information.
520在本实施例中为可选步骤,UE可以接收用于指示针对终端设备特定的第二时延的所述第二指示信息。本实施例中,所述第二时延不是所述第一时延,所述第二时延是网络设备针对该UE偏移到的特定的时延,第一时延为UE最终确定的要用于信道测量(即信道估计)的特定的时延,可选的,所述第二时延也可以不是针对该UE特定的。可选的,所述第二指示信息可以直接携带所述第二时延,也可以携带所述第二时延关联的参数,或者是所述第二时延的变形形式等,总而言之,所述第二指示信息能够直接或间接指示所述第二时延。可以理解,所述第二指示信息可以通过一条或多条信令下发,本申请对此不做限制。应理解,510和520无必然的先后顺序。520 is an optional step in this embodiment, and the UE may receive the second indication information for indicating the second delay specific to the terminal device. In this embodiment, the second delay is not the first delay, the second delay is a specific delay offset by the network device for the UE, and the first delay is a requirement finally determined by the UE A specific delay used for channel measurement (ie, channel estimation). Optionally, the second delay may not be specific to the UE. Optionally, the second indication information may directly carry the second delay, or may carry parameters associated with the second delay, or be a variant of the second delay, etc. In a word, the The second indication information can directly or indirectly indicate the second delay. It can be understood that the second indication information may be issued through one or more pieces of signaling, which is not limited in this application. It should be understood that 510 and 520 are not necessarily in order.
530,终端设备基于所述预编码参考信号和所述终端设备特定的第一时延,进行信道测量,获得各个所述端口对应的叠加系数。530. The terminal device performs channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and the first time delay specific to the terminal device, and obtains a superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports.
与320和430类似,相同的部分在此不再赘述;不同之处在于,本实施例中,所述第 一时延是UE进行时延估计获得的,可以包括:Similar to 320 and 430, the same parts are not repeated here; the difference is that, in this embodiment, the first delay is obtained by the UE performing delay estimation, and may include:
方式一、UE根据所述第二指示信息的指示,在所述第二时延对应的预定时延范围内估计的时延,所述预定时延范围可以是协议约定的一定时延取值范围,UE可以基于网络设备的指示,以第二时延为参考,在预定时延范围内进行时延估计,获得所述第一时延。Mode 1: The UE estimates the delay within a predetermined delay range corresponding to the second delay according to the indication of the second indication information, and the predetermined delay range may be a certain delay value range agreed in the protocol , the UE may perform delay estimation within a predetermined delay range based on the indication of the network device and take the second delay as a reference to obtain the first delay.
以图4实施例中手段(1)为例,与430中手段(1)内容相同的部分在本实施例中不再赘述。UE基于特定的时延τ *(即为所述第二时延,或称作上行时延)进行信道估计后,得到等效信道,即所述
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000067
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000068
其中
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000069
为未考虑τ *得到的等效信道,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000070
是用来利用τ *进行信道估计的对角阵,是如下形式的对角阵:
Taking the means (1) in the embodiment of FIG. 4 as an example, the parts with the same content as the means (1) in 430 will not be repeated in this embodiment. After the UE performs channel estimation based on a specific delay τ * (that is, the second delay, or called uplink delay), the equivalent channel is obtained, that is, the
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000067
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000068
in
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000069
is the equivalent channel obtained without considering τ * ,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000070
is the diagonal matrix used for channel estimation using τ * , and is a diagonal matrix of the form:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000071
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000071
由于存在上下行时延定时偏差,UE基于时延τ *进行信道估计后无法获得正确的时延抽头,因此需要额外基于上下行定时偏差进行信道估计得到等效信道,上行下行定时偏差可由UE侧计算得到,并且记为τ TA,则基于上下行定时偏差进行信道估计后的等效信道记为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000072
Due to the uplink and downlink delay timing deviation, the UE cannot obtain the correct delay tap after channel estimation based on the delay τ * . Therefore, it is necessary to additionally perform channel estimation based on the uplink and downlink timing deviation to obtain the equivalent channel. The uplink and downlink timing deviation can be determined by the UE side. is calculated and denoted as τ TA , then the equivalent channel after channel estimation based on the uplink and downlink timing offset is denoted as
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000072
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000073
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000073
Q TA是用来利用τ TA进行信道估计的对角阵,满足如下形式 Q TA is a diagonal matrix used for channel estimation using τ TA , which satisfies the following form
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000074
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000074
可选的,上述两个步骤可以合为一个步骤,即同时基于τ *和τ TA进行信道估计,即 Optionally, the above two steps can be combined into one step, that is, channel estimation is performed based on τ * and τ TA at the same time, that is,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000075
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000075
*TA)为所述终端设备特定的第一时延。 *TA ) is the first time delay specific to the terminal device.
UE按如下方式计算第n个UE天线对应的P×L个系数:The UE calculates the P×L coefficients corresponding to the nth UE antenna as follows:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000076
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000076
以图4实施例中手段(2)为例,与430中手段(2)内容相同的部分在本实施例中不再赘述。对于与所述τ *相关的w q,利用w q进行信道估计的对角阵,满足如下形式,由网络设备指示的o和O的相关信息决定: Taking the means (2) in the embodiment of FIG. 4 as an example, the parts with the same content as the means (2) in 430 will not be repeated in this embodiment. For w q related to the τ * , the diagonal matrix for channel estimation using w q satisfies the following form, which is determined by the relevant information of o and o indicated by the network device:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000077
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000077
对于与所述τ TA相关的,(过采样)DFT频域向量为w′ q,对应的(过采样)DFT码本的索引(index)的相关信息为O’和o’。利用w′ q进行信道估计的对角阵,满足如下形式,O’和o’由UE决定: For the τ TA , the (oversampled) DFT frequency domain vector is w′ q , and the related information of the index (index) of the corresponding (oversampled) DFT codebook is O′ and o′. The diagonal matrix for channel estimation using w' q satisfies the following form, where O' and o' are determined by the UE:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000078
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000078
方式二、网络设备不发送所述第二指示信息,甚至网络设备没有进行时延偏移的情况下,UE进行时延调节量估计获得所述第一时延(也相当于获得对应的(过采样)DFT频 域向量),可选的,UE可以联合各个端口(可以说联合所有端口)或联合部分端口进行时延调节量估计。与方式一不同,方式二中UE不会分别得到τ *和τ TA,所以方式二中相当于直接基于(τ *TA)进行信道估计,也可以说UE直接基于特定的τ′进行信道估计,τ′为所述终端设备特定的第一时延,τ′等价于(τ *TA)。或者,方式二中UE不会分别得到w q和w′ q,所以方式二中相当于直接基于w q和w′ q进行信道估计,也可以说UE直接基于特定的
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000079
进行信道估计,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000080
等价于w q和w′ q
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000081
对应的(过采样)DFT码本的索引的相关信息为o *和O *,由UE决定。
Mode 2: The network device does not send the second indication information, or even if the network device does not perform delay offset, the UE performs delay adjustment amount estimation to obtain the first delay (which is also equivalent to obtaining the corresponding Sampling) DFT frequency domain vector), optionally, the UE can perform delay adjustment amount estimation in conjunction with each port (it can be said to combine all ports) or in conjunction with some ports. Different from mode 1, UE does not obtain τ * and τ TA respectively in mode 2, so mode 2 is equivalent to performing channel estimation directly based on (τ *TA ), or it can be said that UE directly performs channel estimation based on a specific τ′ It is estimated that τ' is the first time delay specific to the terminal device, and τ' is equivalent to (τ *TA ). Alternatively, the UE does not obtain w q and w' q respectively in the second way, so the second way is equivalent to directly performing channel estimation based on w q and w' q , or it can be said that the UE directly based on the specific
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000079
perform channel estimation,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000080
Equivalent to w q and w′ q ,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000081
The related information of the index of the corresponding (oversampled) DFT codebook is o * and O * , which are determined by the UE.
540,终端设备发送第一指示信息。540. The terminal device sends the first indication information.
相应的网络设备接收所述第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述叠加系数。The corresponding network device receives the first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficient.
540与440类似,相同内容可参见440的描述,在此不再赘述。不同的是,在本实施例中码本结构
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000082
中的Q对于方式一中手段(1)是如下形式的对角阵:
540 is similar to 440. For the same content, reference may be made to the description of 440, which will not be repeated here. The difference is that in this embodiment, the codebook structure
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000082
Q in is a diagonal matrix of the following form for means (1) in way one:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000083
其中,对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000084
f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,(τ *TA)为所述第一时延,τ *为上行时延,τ TA为上下行定时偏差。
Among them, the elements on the diagonal are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000084
f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,..., K, K is the number of subbands, (τ *TA ) is the first delay, and τ * is the uplink delay , τ TA is the uplink and downlink timing deviation.
对于方式二,Q可以等效变形为:For the second way, Q can be equivalently deformed as:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000085
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000085
其中,对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000086
f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数。
Among them, the elements on the diagonal are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000086
f k represents the frequency of the k-th subband, k=1, 2, . . . , K, and K is the number of subbands.
对于方式一中手段(2)Q是如下形式的对角阵:For the means (2) in the first way, Q is a diagonal matrix of the following form:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000087
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000087
其中,该对角阵的对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000088
K为子带的个数,其中o=0,1,...,O-1,o′=0,1,...,O′-1,O为第一(过采样)DFT码本的列数,O’为第二(过采样)DFT码本的列数,O和O’与所述第一时延相关联。可以理解,所述第一(过采样)DFT码本可以由网络设备确定,所述第二(过采样)DFT码本可以由终端设备确定,也就是说O由网络设备确定,O’由UE确定。
Among them, the diagonal elements of the diagonal matrix are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000088
K is the number of subbands, where o=0,1,...,O-1, o'=0,1,...,O'-1, O is the first (oversampling) DFT codebook The number of columns of , O' is the number of columns of the second (oversampled) DFT codebook, and O and O' are associated with the first delay. It can be understood that the first (oversampling) DFT codebook may be determined by the network device, and the second (oversampling) DFT codebook may be determined by the terminal device, that is, O is determined by the network device, and O' is determined by the UE Sure.
对于方式二,Q可以等效变形为:For the second way, Q can be equivalently deformed as:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000089
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000089
其中,该对角阵的对角线上元素为
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000090
K为子带的个数,其 中o *=0,1,...,O *-1。
Among them, the diagonal elements of the diagonal matrix are
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000090
K is the number of subbands, where o * =0,1,...,O * -1.
550,终端设备发送第三指示信息。550. The terminal device sends third indication information.
550为可选的步骤,相应的网络设备接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口选择矩阵W 1。对端口选择矩阵W 1的指示,可以是直接指示或间接指示。 Step 550 is an optional step, and the corresponding network device receives third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the port selection matrix W 1 . The indication to the port selection matrix W1 may be a direct indication or an indirect indication.
560,终端设备发送第四指示信息。560. The terminal device sends fourth indication information.
560为可选的步骤,相应的网络设备接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一时延。可选的,所述第四指示信息可以直接指示或间接指示所述第一时延,例如,所述第四指示信息包括所述第一时延的信息(如,τ *TA、τ′),或所述第四指示信息包括用于获得所述第一时延的时延调节量(如,τ TA),或者包括其他信息(如o/O、o’/O’等)来进行指示。 Step 560 is an optional step, and the corresponding network device receives fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay. Optionally, the fourth indication information may directly indicate or indirectly indicate the first delay. For example, the fourth indication information includes information of the first delay (eg, τ *TA , τ '), or the fourth indication information includes a delay adjustment amount (eg, τ TA ) for obtaining the first delay, or includes other information (eg o/O, o'/O', etc.) to to instruct.
可选的,所述第三指示信息、第四指示信息和所述第一指示信息可以通过一条消息发送或分别通过不同消息发送。Optionally, the third indication information, the fourth indication information and the first indication information may be sent through one message or sent through different messages respectively.
通过本申请实施例,针对可能存在的上下行定时偏差,利用UE进行时延估计来确定针对该UE特定的时延进行信道测量,可以降低上下行定时误差造成时延偏差的影响的同时,降低多用户CSI-RS间的干扰,提高CSI-RS复用率和减少CSI-RS开销。Through the embodiments of the present application, for possible uplink and downlink timing deviations, the UE performs delay estimation to determine the channel measurement for the specific delay of the UE, which can reduce the influence of the uplink and downlink timing errors caused by the delay deviation, and at the same time reduce the Interference between multi-user CSI-RS, improve CSI-RS multiplexing rate and reduce CSI-RS overhead.
需要说明的是,以上图3-图5的实施例中,第一指示信息、第三指示信息、第四指示信息可以通过同一信令发送也可以通过不同信令发送,本申请对此不进行限制。It should be noted that, in the above embodiments of FIG. 3 to FIG. 5 , the first indication information, the third indication information, and the fourth indication information can be sent through the same signaling or through different signaling, and this application does not carry out this. limit.
针对以上图3-图5的实施例,多用户在时延域进行CSI-RS复用下可以降低用户间干扰,以下以两用户为例。为了描述简单,本例子中忽略角度域信息,并假设网络设备和UE均配置1根天线,频域有K个子带,且每个用户仅拥有一条径,预编码参考信号仅对应一个端口的情况下,用户的信道如下所示:For the above embodiments of FIG. 3 to FIG. 5 , the inter-user interference can be reduced when multiple users perform CSI-RS multiplexing in the delay domain, and two users are taken as an example below. For simplicity of description, the angle domain information is ignored in this example, and it is assumed that both the network device and the UE are configured with one antenna, there are K subbands in the frequency domain, each user has only one path, and the precoding reference signal corresponds to only one port. , the user's channel looks like this:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000091
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000091
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000092
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000092
其中α 1、α 2分别为用户1、2对应的叠加系数(即,所述一个端口对应的叠加系数,也可以称作路径复系数),τ 1、τ 2分别为用户1、2的路径时延(假设τ 1≠τ 2),UE1与UE2复用相同的CSI-RS port。 where α 1 and α 2 are the superposition coefficients corresponding to users 1 and 2 respectively (that is, the superposition coefficient corresponding to the one port may also be called a complex path coefficient), and τ 1 and τ 2 are the paths of users 1 and 2 respectively. Time delay (assuming τ 1 ≠τ 2 ), UE1 and UE2 multiplex the same CSI-RS port.
当网络侧对UE 1和UE2统一偏移到某一时延分量(例如,时延0点)时,网络侧下发CSI-RS权值预编码为w=(w 1+w 2) *,w 1和w 2分别是用户1、2的路径时延对应的频域相位变化向量,(w 1+w 2) *是(w 1+w 2)的共轭,UE侧估计路径复系数如下: When the network side uniformly offsets UE 1 and UE 2 to a certain delay component (for example, delay point 0), the network side delivers the CSI-RS weight precoding as w=(w 1 +w 2 ) * , w 1 and w 2 are the frequency domain phase change vectors corresponding to the path delays of users 1 and 2 respectively, (w 1 +w 2 ) * is the conjugate of (w 1 +w 2 ), and the UE side estimates the path complex coefficients as follows:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000093
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000093
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000094
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000094
可以得到
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000095
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000096
的信干比分别为,
can get
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000095
and
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000096
The signal-to-interference ratio of , respectively, is,
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000097
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000097
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000098
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000098
当网络设备对UE 1偏移到UE1特定的第一时延(假设是时延0点),网络设备对UE 2偏移到UE2特定的第一时延(假设是τ *)时,网络侧下发CSI-RS权值预编码为w=(w 1+Qw 2) *,其中Q为对角阵: When the network device offsets UE1 to the UE1-specific first delay (assuming that the delay is 0 point), and the network device offsets UE2 to the UE2-specific first delay (assuming that it is τ * ), the network side The precoding of the delivered CSI-RS weights is w=(w 1 +Qw 2 ) * , where Q is a diagonal matrix:
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000099
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000099
UE侧估计路径系数为The estimated path coefficient on the UE side is
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000100
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000100
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000101
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000101
可以得到
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000102
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000103
的信干比分别为
can get
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000102
and
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000103
The signal-to-interference ratio of
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000104
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000104
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000105
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000105
K是所述的子带数目,由γ 1
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000106
γ 2
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000107
比较可知,可以通过设计矩阵Q使得
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000108
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000109
即估计路径复系数信干比提升,特别地当w 1与w 2不正交时,可以选择Q使得Q Hw 1与w 2正交,此时复用CSI-RS,多用户之间无干扰。
K is the number of subbands described by γ1 and
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000106
2 with
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000107
It can be seen from the comparison that the matrix Q can be designed such that
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000108
Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-000109
That is, the signal-to-interference ratio of the estimated path complex coefficients is improved, especially when w 1 and w 2 are not orthogonal, Q can be selected so that Q H w 1 and w 2 are orthogonal. At this time, the CSI-RS is multiplexed, and there is no interference.
以上,详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下,结合图6至图8详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信装置。The methods provided by the embodiments of the present application are described in detail above. Hereinafter, the communication apparatus provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 .
图6是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图所示,该通信装置1000可以包括通信单元1100和处理单元1200。FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, the communication apparatus 1000 may include a communication unit 1100 and a processing unit 1200 .
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可对应于上文装置实施例中的终端设备,例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的芯片。In a possible design, the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the terminal equipment in the above apparatus embodiments, for example, may be a terminal equipment, or a chip configured in the terminal equipment.
具体地,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法300中的终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图3中的方法300中的终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图3中的方法300的相应流程。Specifically, the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 300 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the method 300 in FIG. 3 . Moreover, each unit in the communication apparatus 1000 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 300 in FIG. 3 .
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图3中的方法300时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法300中的步骤310涉及终端接收的步骤,用于执行步骤330,340涉及终端发送的步骤,处理单元1200可用于执行方法300中的步骤320。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 300 in FIG. 3 , the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the step 310 in the method 300 involving terminal reception, and to execute the steps 330 and 340 involve the terminal sending, the processing unit 1200 may be used to perform step 320 in method 300 .
具体地,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法400中的终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图4中的方法400中的终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图4中的方法400的相应流程。Specifically, the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the method 400 in FIG. 4 . Moreover, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 400 in FIG. 4 .
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图4中的方法400时,通信单元1100可用于执行 方法400中的步骤410,420涉及终端接收的步骤,用于执行步骤440,450涉及终端发送的步骤,处理单元1200可用于执行方法400中的步骤430。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 400 in FIG. 4 , the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the steps 410 and 420 of the method 400 involving terminal reception, and the processing unit 1200 to execute the steps 440 and 450 involve the terminal transmission. may be used to perform step 430 in method 400 .
具体地,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法500中的终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图5中的方法500中的终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5中的方法500的相应流程。Specifically, the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the terminal device in the method 500 in FIG. 5 . Moreover, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 500 in FIG. 5 .
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图5中的方法500时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法500中的步骤510,520涉及终端接收的步骤,用于执行步骤540,550,560涉及终端发送的步骤,处理单元1200可用于执行方法500中的步骤530。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 500 in FIG. 5 , the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the steps 510 and 520 in the method 500 involving terminal reception, and the processing unit 1200 to execute the steps 540, 550 and 560 involve the terminal sending. may be used to perform step 530 in method 500 .
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述装置实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the above-mentioned corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above-mentioned apparatus embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为终端设备时,该通信装置1000中的通信单元1100可对应于图7中示出的终端设备2000中的收发器2020,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1200可对应于图7中示出的终端设备2000中的处理器2010。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a terminal device, the communication unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 7 , and the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may Corresponds to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 7 .
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1000中的通信单元1100可以为输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出/输入电路、管脚或相关电路等,处理单元1200可以为处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路。It should also be understood that when the communication apparatus 1000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device, the communication unit 1100 in the communication apparatus 1000 may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output/input circuit, a pin or a related circuit etc., the processing unit 1200 may be a processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
具体地,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法300中的网络设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图3的方法300中的网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图3中的方法300的相应流程。Specifically, the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 300 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the method performed by the network device in the method 300 of FIG. 3 . Moreover, each unit in the communication apparatus 1000 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 300 in FIG. 3 .
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图3中的方法300时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法300中的步骤310涉及网络设备发送的步骤,用于执行步骤330,340涉及网络设备接收的步骤,处理单元1200可用于执行方法300中生成预编码参考信号的步骤。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 300 in FIG. 3 , the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the step 310 of the method 300 involving sending by the network device, and be used to execute the steps 330 and 340 involving the receiving of the network device. Unit 1200 may be configured to perform the steps of method 300 for generating a precoding reference signal.
具体地,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法400中的网络设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图4的方法400中的网络设备执行的装置的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图4中的方法400的相应流程。Specifically, the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 400 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the apparatus executed by the network device in the method 400 of FIG. 4 . Moreover, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 400 in FIG. 4 .
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图4中的方法400时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法400中的步骤410,420涉及网络设备发送的步骤,用于执行步骤440,450涉及网络设备接收的步骤,处理单元1200可用于执行方法400中生成预编码参考信号和第二指示信息的步骤。Wherein, when the communication apparatus 1000 is used to execute the method 400 in FIG. 4 , the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the steps 410 and 420 of the method 400 involving sending by the network device, and to execute the steps 440 and 450 involving the receiving of the network device, and the processing The unit 1200 may be configured to perform the steps of generating the precoding reference signal and the second indication information in the method 400 .
具体地,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法500中的网络设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图5的方法500中的网络设备执行的装置的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5中的方法500的相应流程。Specifically, the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication apparatus 1000 may include a unit for executing the apparatus executed by the network device in the method 500 of FIG. 5 . Moreover, each unit in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions mentioned above are respectively for realizing the corresponding flow of the method 500 in FIG. 5 .
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图5中的方法500时,通信单元1100可用于执行方法500中的步骤510,520涉及网络设备发送的步骤,用于执行步骤540,550,560涉及网络设备接收的步骤,处理单元1200可用于执行方法500中生成预编码参考信号和/或第二 指示信息的步骤。Wherein, when the communication apparatus 1000 is used to execute the method 500 in FIG. 5 , the communication unit 1100 can be used to execute the steps 510 and 520 of the method 500 involving sending by the network device, and be used to execute the steps 540, 550 and 560 involving the receiving of the network device. The unit 1200 may be configured to perform the step of generating the precoding reference signal and/or the second indication information in the method 500 .
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述装置实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the above-mentioned corresponding steps has been described in detail in the above-mentioned apparatus embodiments, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为网络设备时,该通信装置1000中的通信单元为可对应于图8中示出的网络设备3000中的收发器3200,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1200可对应于图8中示出的网络设备3000中的处理器3100。It should also be understood that when the communication apparatus 1000 is a network device, the communication unit in the communication apparatus 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network apparatus 3000 shown in FIG. 8 , and the processing unit 1200 in the communication apparatus 1000 may Corresponds to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 8 .
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统时,该通信装置1000中的通信单元1100可以为输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出/输入电路、管脚或相关电路等,处理单元1200可以为处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路。It should also be understood that when the communication apparatus 1000 is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device, the communication unit 1100 in the communication apparatus 1000 may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output/input circuit, a pin or a related circuit etc., the processing unit 1200 may be a processor, a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
图7是本申请实施例提供的终端设备2000的结构示意图。该终端设备2000可应用于如图1a和1b所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 2000 can be applied to the systems shown in FIGS. 1 a and 1 b to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
如图所示,该终端设备2000包括处理器2010和收发器2020。可选地,该终端设备2000还包括存储器2030。其中,处理器2010、收发器2020和存储器2030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器2030用于存储计算机程序,该处理器2010用于从该存储器2030中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器2020收发信号。可选地,终端设备2000还可以包括天线2040,用于将收发器2020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。As shown in the figure, the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020 . Optionally, the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030 . The processor 2010, the transceiver 2020 and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transmit control and/or data signals. The memory 2030 is used to store computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used to retrieve data from the memory 2030 The computer program is called and executed to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for sending the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through wireless signals.
上述处理器2010可以和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中,或者独立于处理器2010。该处理器2010可以与图6中的处理单元对应。The above-mentioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program codes stored in the memory 2030 to realize the above-mentioned functions. During specific implementation, the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010 . The processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 6 .
上述收发器2020可以与图6中的通信单元对应,也可以称为收发单元。收发器2020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The foregoing transceiver 2020 may correspond to the communication unit in FIG. 6 , and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit. The transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used for receiving signals, and the transmitter is used for transmitting signals.
应理解,图7所示的终端设备2000能够实现图3-图4所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备2000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述装置实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述装置实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 7 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 4 . The operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing apparatus embodiments. For details, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing apparatus embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述处理器2010可以用于执行前面装置实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器2020可以用于执行前面装置实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面装置实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 2010 may be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing apparatus embodiments that are implemented inside the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 may be used to perform the operations described in the foregoing apparatus embodiments that the terminal equipment sends to or receives from the network device. action. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the foregoing apparatus embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述终端设备2000还可以包括电源2050,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the above terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备2000还可以包括输入单元2060、显示单元2070、音频电路2080、摄像头2090和传感器2100等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器2082、麦克风2084等。In addition, in order to make the functions of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device 2000 may further include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, a sensor 2100, etc., the audio circuit Speakers 2082, microphones 2084, etc. may also be included.
图8是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,该网络设备3000可应用于如图1a所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The network device 3000 may be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1a to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
在5G通信系统中,网络设备3000可以包括CU、DU和AAU相比于LTE通信系统 中的网络设备由一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)和一个或多个基带单元(base band unit,BBU)来说:In the 5G communication system, the network device 3000 may include CU, DU, and AAU. Compared with the network device in the LTE communication system, the network device is composed of one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) and one or more radio frequency units. For a base band unit (BBU):
原BBU的非实时部分将分割出来,重新定义为CU,负责处理非实时协议和服务、BBU的部分物理层处理功能与原RRU及无源天线合并为AAU、BBU的剩余功能重新定义为DU,负责处理物理层协议和实时服务。简而言之,CU和DU,以处理内容的实时性进行区分、AAU为RRU和天线的组合。The non-real-time part of the original BBU will be divided and redefined as CU, which is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services. Part of the physical layer processing function of the BBU is merged with the original RRU and passive antenna into AAU, and the remaining functions of the BBU are redefined as DU. Responsible for handling physical layer protocols and real-time services. In short, CU and DU are distinguished by the real-time nature of processing content, and AAU is a combination of RRU and antenna.
CU、DU、AAU可以采取分离或合设的方式,所以,会出现多种网络部署形态,一种可能的部署形态如图8所示与传统4G网络设备一致,CU与DU共硬件部署。应理解,图8只是一种示例,对本申请的保护范围并不限制,例如,部署形态还可以是DU部署在BBU机房,CU集中部署或DU集中部署,CU更高层次集中等。CU, DU, and AAU can be separated or co-located. Therefore, there will be various network deployment forms. One possible deployment form is shown in Figure 8, which is consistent with traditional 4G network equipment. CU and DU share hardware deployment. It should be understood that FIG. 8 is only an example, and the protection scope of the present application is not limited. For example, the deployment form may also be that DUs are deployed in the BBU equipment room, CUs are deployed in a centralized manner, or DUs are centrally deployed, and CUs are centralized at higher levels.
所述AAU3100可以实现收发功能称为收发单元3100,与图6中的通信单元1100对应。可选地,该收发单元3100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等,其可以包括至少一个天线3101和射频单元3102。可选地,收发单元3100可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述CU和DU3200可以实现内部处理功能称为处理单元3200,与图6中的处理单元1200对应。可选地,该处理单元3200可以对网络设备进行控制等,可以称为控制器。所述AAU与CU和DU可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的。The AAU 3100 can implement a transceiving function and is called a transceiving unit 3100, which corresponds to the communication unit 1100 in FIG. 6 . Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102 . Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a sending unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or called a receiver, a receiving circuit), and the sending unit may correspond to a transmitter (or called a transmitter, a sending circuit). The CU and DU 3200 can implement an internal processing function called a processing unit 3200, which corresponds to the processing unit 1200 in FIG. 6 . Optionally, the processing unit 3200 may control network devices, etc., and may be referred to as a controller. The AAU, the CU and the DU may be physically set together, or may be physically separated.
另外,网络设备不限于图8所示的形态,也可以是其它形态:例如:包括BBU和自适应无线单元(adaptive radio unit,ARU),或者包括BBU和有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU);也可以为客户终端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE),还可以为其它形态,本申请不限定。In addition, the network device is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 8, and can also be in other forms: for example: including BBU and adaptive radio unit (adaptive radio unit, ARU), or including BBU and active antenna unit (active antenna unit, AAU) ); may also be customer terminal equipment (customer premises equipment, CPE), or may be other forms, which are not limited in this application.
在一个示例中,所述处理单元3200可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 3200还包括存储器3201和处理器3202。所述存储器3201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器3202用于控制网络设备进行必要的动作,例如用于控制网络设备执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器3201和处理器3202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the processing unit 3200 may be composed of one or more boards, and the multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access standard, or may support different access standards respectively. wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202. The memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 3202 is configured to control the network device to perform necessary actions, for example, configured to control the network device to execute the operation flow of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments. The memory 3201 and processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. That is to say, the memory and processor can be provided separately on each single board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits may also be provided on each single board.
应理解,图8所示的网络设备3000能够实现图3-图5的方法实施例中涉及的网络设备功能。网络设备3000中的各个单元的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现本申请方法实施例中由网络设备执行的相应流程。为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。图8示例的网络设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的网络设备结构的可能。It should be understood that the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 8 can implement the network device functions involved in the method embodiments of FIGS. 3-5 . The operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 3000 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes executed by the network device in the method embodiments of the present application. To avoid repetition, the detailed description is appropriately omitted here. The structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 8 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of network device structures that may appear in the future.
上述CU和DU 3200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而AAU 3100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned CU and DU 3200 can be used to perform the actions implemented by the network device described in the previous method embodiments, and the AAU 3100 can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiments. Send to or receive from the terminal device. action. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和通信接口;所述处理器,用于执 行计算机程序,使得所述处理装置实现上述方法实施例中的方法。Embodiments of the present application further provide a processing apparatus, including a processor and a communication interface; the processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the processing apparatus implements the methods in the above method embodiments.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个芯片或芯片系统。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。所述通信接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。It should be understood that the above processing device may be a chip or a chip system. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a system on chip (SoC), or a It is a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips. The communication interface may be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit, etc. on the chip or the chip system. The processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
在实现过程中,上述装置的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的装置的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述装置的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned apparatus may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the apparatus disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above device in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述装置实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各装置、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的装置的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述装置的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the foregoing apparatus embodiment may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The aforementioned processors may be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . Each device, step, and logic block diagram disclosed in the embodiments of this application can be implemented or executed. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the apparatus disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above device in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和装置的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and devices described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
根据本申请实施例提供的装置,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产 品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图3-图5所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the device provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the steps shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 . The method of any one of the illustrated embodiments.
根据本申请实施例提供的装置,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图3-图5所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the device provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application further provides a computer-readable medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program codes, and when the program codes are run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the programs shown in FIGS. 3-5 . The method of any one of the illustrated embodiments.
根据本申请实施例提供的装置,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the apparatus provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application further provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, high-density digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state discs, SSD)) etc.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和装置实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行装置实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的装置实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in the above-mentioned various apparatus embodiments completely corresponds to the terminal equipment and the network equipment or terminal equipment in the apparatus For the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving may be performed by a processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, reference may be made to the corresponding device embodiments. The number of processors may be one or more.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system" and the like are used in this specification to refer to a computer-related entity, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, a component may be, but is not limited to, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer. By way of illustration, both an application running on a computing device and the computing device may be components. One or more components may reside within a process and/or thread of execution, and a component may be localized on one computer and/or distributed between 2 or more computers. In addition, these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. A component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems via signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同装置来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware accomplish. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different means for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装 置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述装置实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the above-described systems, devices and units may refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing device embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和装置,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and devices may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,各功能单元的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, the functions of each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center is by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that includes an integration of one or more available media. The usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述装置的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the apparatus described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, removable hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited to this. should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (55)

  1. 一种信道测量的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for channel measurement, characterized in that the method comprises:
    接收预编码参考信号,所述预编码参考信号对应一个或多个端口;receiving a precoding reference signal, the precoding reference signal corresponding to one or more ports;
    基于所述预编码参考信号和终端设备特定的第一时延,进行信道测量,获得各个所述端口对应的叠加系数;Based on the precoding reference signal and the terminal-specific first delay, channel measurement is performed to obtain a superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports;
    发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述叠加系数。Send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficient.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100001
    其中W 1为所述端口的端口选择矩阵,W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,W f是频率分量矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100002
    表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。
    The method according to claim 1, wherein the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is used to determine a first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100001
    Wherein W 1 is the port selection matrix of the port, W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, and W f is the frequency component matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100002
    represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100003
    其中W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,或者W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数中所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵;W f是频率分量矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100004
    表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。
    The method according to claim 1, wherein the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is used to determine a first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100003
    Wherein W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, or W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports in the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports; W f is the frequency component matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100004
    represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Q为:The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the Q is:
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100005
    其中对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100006
    f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,τ *为所述第一时延;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100005
    The elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100006
    f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,...,K, K is the number of subbands, and τ * is the first delay; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100007
    其中o=0,1,…,O-1,对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100008
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100009
    K为子带的个数,O为过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本的列数,O与所述第一时延相关联;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100007
    Where o=0,1,...,O-1, the elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100008
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100009
    K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the oversampled discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook, and O is associated with the first delay; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100010
    其中对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100011
    f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,(τ *TA)为所述第一时延,τ *为上行时延,τ TA为上下行定时偏差;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100010
    The elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100011
    f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,..., K, K is the number of subbands, (τ *TA ) is the first delay, and τ * is the uplink delay , τ TA is the uplink and downlink timing offset; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100012
    其中o=0,1,…,O-1,o′=0,1,…,O′-1,对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100013
    K为子带的个数,O为第一过采样DFT码本的列数,O’为第二过采样DFT码本的列数,O和O’与所述第一时延相关联。
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100012
    Where o=0,1,...,O-1, o'=0,1,...,O'-1, the elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100013
    K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the first oversampling DFT codebook, O' is the number of columns of the second oversampling DFT codebook, and O and O' are associated with the first delay.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示针对终端设备特定的第二时延。Second indication information is received, where the second indication information is used to indicate a second delay specific to the terminal device.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 5, wherein:
    所述第二指示信息包括所述第二时延的信息,或The second indication information includes the information of the second delay, or
    所述第二指示信息包括过采样DFT码本的索引。The second indication information includes an index of the oversampled DFT codebook.
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二时延为所述第一时延。The method according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the second delay is the first delay.
  8. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时延为在所述第二时延对应的预定时延范围内确定的时延。The method according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the first delay is a delay determined within a predetermined delay range corresponding to the second delay.
  9. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时延为进行时延调节量估计所获得的时延。The method according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein the first delay is a delay obtained by estimating a delay adjustment amount.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一时延。Send fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 10, wherein:
    所述第四指示信息包括所述第一时延的信息,或The fourth indication information includes the information of the first delay, or
    所述第四指示信息包括用于获得所述第一时延的时延调节量的信息。The fourth indication information includes information for obtaining a delay adjustment amount of the first delay.
  12. 根据权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-11, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口的端口选择矩阵。Send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the port selection matrix of the port.
  13. 一种信道测量的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for channel measurement, characterized in that the method comprises:
    生成预编码参考信号,所述预编码参考信号对应一个或多个端口;generating a precoding reference signal, the precoding reference signal corresponding to one or more ports;
    发送所述预编码参考信号;sending the precoding reference signal;
    接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示各个所述端口对应的叠加系数,所述叠加系数关联针对终端设备特定的第一时延。First indication information is received, where the first indication information is used to indicate a superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports, where the superposition coefficient is associated with a first delay specific to the terminal device.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100014
    其中W 1为所述端口的端口选择矩阵,W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,W f是频率分量矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100015
    表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。
    The method according to claim 13, wherein the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is used to determine a first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100014
    Wherein W 1 is the port selection matrix of the port, W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, and W f is the frequency component matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100015
    represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100016
    其中W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,或者W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数中所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵;W f是频率分量矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100017
    表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。
    The method according to claim 13, wherein the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is used to determine a first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100016
    Wherein W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, or W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports in the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports; W f is the frequency component matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100017
    represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述Q为:The method according to claim 14 or 15, wherein the Q is:
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100018
    其中对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100019
    f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,τ *为所述第一时延;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100018
    The elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100019
    f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,...,K, K is the number of subbands, and τ * is the first delay; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100020
    其中o=0,1,…,O-1,对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100021
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100022
    K为子带的个数,O为过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本的列数,O与所述第一时延相关联;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100020
    Where o=0,1,...,O-1, the elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100021
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100022
    K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the oversampled discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook, and O is associated with the first delay; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100023
    其中对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100024
    f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,(τ *TA)为所述第一时延,τ *为上行时延,τ TA为上下行定时偏差;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100023
    The elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100024
    f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,..., K, K is the number of subbands, (τ *TA ) is the first delay, and τ * is the uplink delay , τ TA is the uplink and downlink timing offset; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100025
    其中o=0,1,…,O-1,o′=0,1,…,O′-1,对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100026
    K为子带的个数,O为第一过采样DFT码本的列数,O’为第二过采样DFT码本的列数,O和O’与所述第一时延相关联。
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100025
    Where o=0,1,...,O-1, o'=0,1,...,O'-1, the elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100026
    K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the first oversampling DFT codebook, O' is the number of columns of the second oversampling DFT codebook, and O and O' are associated with the first delay.
  17. 根据权利要求13-16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13-16, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示针对终端设备特定的第二时延。Send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a second delay specific to the terminal device.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 17, wherein:
    所述第二指示信息包括所述第二时延的信息,或The second indication information includes the information of the second delay, or
    所述第二指示信息包括过采样DFT码本的索引。The second indication information includes an index of the oversampled DFT codebook.
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二时延为所述第一时延。The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the second delay is the first delay.
  20. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时延为在所述第二时延对应的预定时延范围内确定的时延。The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the first delay is a delay determined within a predetermined delay range corresponding to the second delay.
  21. 根据权利要求13-16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时延为终端设备进行时延调节量估计所获得的时延。The method according to any one of claims 13-16, wherein the first delay is a delay obtained by the terminal device estimating the delay adjustment amount.
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 20 or 21, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一时延。Fourth indication information is received, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 22, wherein:
    所述第四指示信息包括所述第一时延的信息,或The fourth indication information includes the information of the first delay, or
    所述第四指示信息包括用于获得所述第一时延的时延调节量的信息。The fourth indication information includes information for obtaining a delay adjustment amount of the first delay.
  24. 根据权利要求13-23任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13-23, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口的端口选择矩阵。Third indication information is received, where the third indication information is used to indicate a port selection matrix of the port.
  25. 一种信道测量的装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A device for channel measurement, characterized in that the device comprises:
    通信单元,用于接收预编码参考信号,所述预编码参考信号对应一个或多个端口;a communication unit, configured to receive a precoding reference signal, where the precoding reference signal corresponds to one or more ports;
    处理单元,用于基于所述预编码参考信号和终端设备特定的第一时延,进行信道测量,获得各个所述端口对应的叠加系数;a processing unit, configured to perform channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal and the first time delay specific to the terminal device, and obtain a superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports;
    所述通信单元还用于发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述叠加系数。The communication unit is further configured to send first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the superposition coefficient.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100027
    其中W 1为所述端口的端口选择矩阵,W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,W f是频率分量矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100028
    表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。
    The apparatus according to claim 25, wherein the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is used to determine a first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100027
    Wherein W 1 is the port selection matrix of the port, W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, and W f is the frequency component matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100028
    represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  27. 根据权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于 确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100029
    其中W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,或者W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数中所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵;W f是频率分量矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100030
    表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。
    The apparatus according to claim 25, wherein the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is used to determine a first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100029
    Wherein W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, or W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports in the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports; W f is the frequency component matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100030
    represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的装置,其特征在于,所述Q为:The device according to claim 26 or 27, wherein the Q is:
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100031
    其中对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100032
    f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,τ *为所述第一时延;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100031
    The elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100032
    f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1,2,...,K, K is the number of subbands, and τ * is the first delay; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100033
    其中o=0,1,…,O-1,对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100034
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100035
    K为子带的个数,O为过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本的列数,O与所述第一时延相关联;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100033
    Where o=0,1,...,O-1, the elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100034
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100035
    K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the oversampled discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook, and O is associated with the first delay; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100036
    其中对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100037
    f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,(τ *TA)为所述第一时延,τ *为上行时延,τ TA为上下行定时偏差;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100036
    The elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100037
    f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,..., K, K is the number of subbands, (τ *TA ) is the first delay, and τ * is the uplink delay , τ TA is the uplink and downlink timing offset; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100038
    其中o=0,1,…,O-1,o′=0,1,…,O′-1,对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100039
    K为子带的个数,O为第一过采样DFT码本的列数,O’为第二过采样DFT码本的列数,O和O’与所述第一时延相关联。
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100038
    Where o=0,1,...,O-1, o'=0,1,...,O'-1, the elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100039
    K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the first oversampling DFT codebook, O' is the number of columns of the second oversampling DFT codebook, and O and O' are associated with the first delay.
  29. 根据权利要求25-28任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 25-28, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示针对终端设备特定的第二时延。Second indication information is received, where the second indication information is used to indicate a second delay specific to the terminal device.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的装置,其特征在于,The apparatus of claim 29, wherein:
    所述第二指示信息包括所述第二时延的信息,或The second indication information includes the information of the second delay, or
    所述第二指示信息包括过采样DFT码本的索引。The second indication information includes an index of the oversampled DFT codebook.
  31. 根据权利要求29或30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二时延为所述第一时延。The apparatus according to claim 29 or 30, wherein the second delay is the first delay.
  32. 根据权利要求29或30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一时延为在所述第二时延对应的预定时延范围内确定的时延。The apparatus according to claim 29 or 30, wherein the first delay is a delay determined within a predetermined delay range corresponding to the second delay.
  33. 根据权利要求25-28任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一时延为进行时延调节量估计所获得的时延。The apparatus according to any one of claims 25-28, wherein the first delay is a delay obtained by estimating a delay adjustment amount.
  34. 根据权利要求32或33所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to claim 32 or 33, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一时延。Send fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,The apparatus of claim 34, wherein:
    所述第四指示信息包括所述第一时延的信息,或The fourth indication information includes the information of the first delay, or
    所述第四指示信息包括用于获得所述第一时延的时延调节量的信息。The fourth indication information includes information for obtaining a delay adjustment amount of the first delay.
  36. 根据权利要求25-35任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 25-35, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口的端口选择矩阵。Send third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the port selection matrix of the port.
  37. 根据权利要求25-36任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置为终端设备,所述通信单元为收发器,所述处理单元为处理器。The apparatus according to any one of claims 25-36, wherein the apparatus is a terminal device, the communication unit is a transceiver, and the processing unit is a processor.
  38. 一种信道测量的装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A device for channel measurement, characterized in that the device comprises:
    处理单元,用于生成预编码参考信号,所述预编码参考信号对应一个或多个端口;a processing unit, configured to generate a precoding reference signal, where the precoding reference signal corresponds to one or more ports;
    通信单元,用于发送所述预编码参考信号;a communication unit, configured to send the precoding reference signal;
    所述通信单元还用于接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示各个所述端口对应的叠加系数,所述叠加系数关联针对终端设备特定的第一时延。The communication unit is further configured to receive first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a superposition coefficient corresponding to each of the ports, and the superposition coefficient is associated with a first delay specific to the terminal device.
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100040
    其中W 1为所述端口的端口选择矩阵,W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,W f是频率分量矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100041
    表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。
    The apparatus according to claim 38, wherein the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is used to determine a first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100040
    Wherein W 1 is the port selection matrix of the port, W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, and W f is the frequency component matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100041
    represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  40. 根据权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述各个端口对应的叠加系数用于确定第一码本,所述第一码本满足
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100042
    其中W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵,或者W 2为所述各个端口对应的叠加系数中所选的端口对应的叠加系数的叠加系数矩阵;W f是频率分量矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100043
    表示W f的共轭转置,Q是所述第一时延相关的对角阵,Q H表示Q的共轭转置。
    The apparatus according to claim 38, wherein the superposition coefficient corresponding to each port is used to determine a first codebook, and the first codebook satisfies
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100042
    Wherein W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports, or W 2 is the superposition coefficient matrix of the superposition coefficients corresponding to the selected ports in the superposition coefficients corresponding to the respective ports; W f is the frequency component matrix,
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100043
    represents the conjugate transpose of W f , Q is the diagonal matrix of the first delay correlation, and Q H represents the conjugate transpose of Q.
  41. 根据权利要求39或40所述的装置,其特征在于,所述Q为:The device according to claim 39 or 40, wherein the Q is:
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100044
    其中对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100045
    f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,τ *为所述第一时延;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100044
    The elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100045
    f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,...,K, K is the number of subbands, and τ * is the first delay; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100046
    其中o=0,1,…,O-1,对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100047
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100048
    K为子带的个数,O为过采样离散傅里叶变换DFT码本的列数,O与所述第一时延相关联;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100046
    Where o=0,1,...,O-1, the elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100047
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100048
    K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the oversampled discrete Fourier transform DFT codebook, and O is associated with the first delay; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100049
    其中对角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100050
    f k表示第k个子带的频率,k=1,2,……,K,K为子带的个数,(τ *TA)为所述第一时延,τ *为上行时延,τ TA为上下行定时偏差;或者
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100049
    The elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100050
    f k represents the frequency of the kth subband, k=1, 2,..., K, K is the number of subbands, (τ *TA ) is the first delay, and τ * is the uplink delay , τ TA is the uplink and downlink timing offset; or
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100051
    其中o=0,1,…,O-1,o′=0,1,…,O′-1,对 角线上元素为
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100052
    K为子带的个数,O为第一过采样DFT码本的列数,O’为第二过采样DFT码本的列数,O和O’与所述第一时延相关联。
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100051
    Where o=0,1,...,O-1, o'=0,1,...,O'-1, the elements on the diagonal are
    Figure PCTCN2021116199-appb-100052
    K is the number of subbands, O is the number of columns of the first oversampling DFT codebook, O' is the number of columns of the second oversampling DFT codebook, and O and O' are associated with the first delay.
  42. 根据权利要求38-41任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 38-41, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示针对终端设备特定的第二时延。Send second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate a second delay specific to the terminal device.
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的装置,其特征在于,The apparatus of claim 42, wherein
    所述第二指示信息包括所述第二时延的信息,或The second indication information includes the information of the second delay, or
    所述第二指示信息包括过采样DFT码本的索引。The second indication information includes an index of the oversampled DFT codebook.
  44. 根据权利要求42或43所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二时延为所述第一时延。The apparatus according to claim 42 or 43, wherein the second delay is the first delay.
  45. 根据权利要求42或43所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一时延为在所述第二时延对应的预定时延范围内确定的时延。The apparatus according to claim 42 or 43, wherein the first delay is a delay determined within a predetermined delay range corresponding to the second delay.
  46. 根据权利要求38-41任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一时延为终端设备进行时延调节量估计所获得的时延。The apparatus according to any one of claims 38-41, wherein the first delay is a delay obtained by the terminal equipment estimating the delay adjustment amount.
  47. 根据权利要求45或46所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The apparatus according to claim 45 or 46, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一时延。Fourth indication information is received, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the first delay.
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的装置,其特征在于,The apparatus of claim 47, wherein:
    所述第四指示信息包括所述第一时延的信息,或The fourth indication information includes the information of the first delay, or
    所述第四指示信息包括用于获得所述第一时延的时延调节量的信息。The fourth indication information includes information for obtaining a delay adjustment amount of the first delay.
  49. 根据权利要求38-48任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 38-48, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述端口的端口选择矩阵。Third indication information is received, where the third indication information is used to indicate a port selection matrix of the port.
  50. 根据权利要求38-49任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置为网络设备,所述通信单元为收发器,所述处理单元为处理器。The apparatus according to any one of claims 38-49, wherein the apparatus is a network device, the communication unit is a transceiver, and the processing unit is a processor.
  51. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,所述包括至少一个处理器和通信接口;A processing device, characterized in that it comprises at least one processor and a communication interface;
    所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息;the communication interface is used to input and/or output information;
    所述处理器用于执行计算机程序,使得如权利要求1-24任一项所述的方法被实现。The processor is adapted to execute a computer program such that the method of any of claims 1-24 is implemented.
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的处理装置,其特征在于,所述处理装置还包括存储器,用于存储所述计算机程序。The processing device according to claim 51, wherein the processing device further comprises a memory for storing the computer program.
  53. 根据权利要求51或52所述的处理装置,其特征在于,所述处理装置为芯片或芯片系统。The processing device according to claim 51 or 52, wherein the processing device is a chip or a chip system.
  54. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求1-24任一项所述的方法被实现。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which, when the computer program runs on a computer, enables the method according to any one of claims 1-24 to be implemented.
  55. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求1-24任一项所述的方法被实现。A computer program product, characterized in that it comprises a computer program which, when run on a computer, causes the method according to any one of claims 1-24 to be implemented.
PCT/CN2021/116199 2020-09-02 2021-09-02 Method and device for channel measurement WO2022048593A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010908771.6 2020-09-02
CN202010908771.6A CN114204970A (en) 2020-09-02 2020-09-02 Method and device for channel measurement

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022048593A1 true WO2022048593A1 (en) 2022-03-10

Family

ID=80492214

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/116199 WO2022048593A1 (en) 2020-09-02 2021-09-02 Method and device for channel measurement

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114204970A (en)
WO (1) WO2022048593A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114614866A (en) * 2022-03-25 2022-06-10 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Method and device for accessing conjugate symmetric matrix data and terminal
WO2024088162A1 (en) * 2022-10-27 2024-05-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 Information transmission method, information processing method, apparatus, and communication device

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117375678A (en) * 2022-06-30 2024-01-09 华为技术有限公司 Feedback method of channel state information and communication device
CN117792443A (en) * 2022-09-21 2024-03-29 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, device and system
CN115334578B (en) * 2022-10-14 2023-01-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Terminal interference measuring method, system, electronic device and readable storage medium

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106301490A (en) * 2015-05-15 2017-01-04 索尼公司 Apparatus and method in wireless communication system and wireless communication system
CN109150265A (en) * 2017-06-15 2019-01-04 华为技术有限公司 Send and receive method, the network equipment and the terminal device of reference signal
CN111342873A (en) * 2018-12-18 2020-06-26 华为技术有限公司 Channel measurement method and communication device
CN111342912A (en) * 2018-12-18 2020-06-26 华为技术有限公司 Channel measurement method and communication device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106301490A (en) * 2015-05-15 2017-01-04 索尼公司 Apparatus and method in wireless communication system and wireless communication system
CN109150265A (en) * 2017-06-15 2019-01-04 华为技术有限公司 Send and receive method, the network equipment and the terminal device of reference signal
CN111342873A (en) * 2018-12-18 2020-06-26 华为技术有限公司 Channel measurement method and communication device
CN111342912A (en) * 2018-12-18 2020-06-26 华为技术有限公司 Channel measurement method and communication device

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114614866A (en) * 2022-03-25 2022-06-10 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Method and device for accessing conjugate symmetric matrix data and terminal
WO2024088162A1 (en) * 2022-10-27 2024-05-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 Information transmission method, information processing method, apparatus, and communication device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114204970A (en) 2022-03-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022048593A1 (en) Method and device for channel measurement
US20220263560A1 (en) Channel state information reporting method and communications apparatus
WO2021037200A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US20220217567A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communications apparatus
US20230013510A1 (en) Method for indicating channel state information csi measurement and communication apparatus
WO2021203373A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US10505779B2 (en) Method and apparatus for obtaining downlink channel information and network side device
WO2021081847A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2021159309A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
US20230379020A1 (en) Precoding method and apparatus
WO2024027394A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021159537A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus
US11784853B2 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2023165458A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and communication apparatus
US20230019630A1 (en) Update Method and Communications Apparatus
WO2022227976A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2022121746A1 (en) Method for feeding back channel information and communication device
WO2022262545A1 (en) Method and apparatus for feeding back channel state information
US20220271900A1 (en) Method for configuring transmit port of downlink reference signal and communication apparatus
WO2022083307A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2021063210A1 (en) Instruction receiving method, instruction sending method, and communication apparatus
WO2024093867A1 (en) Precoding indication method, and communication apparatus
WO2022147709A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021146961A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining downlink channel state information
WO2024032241A1 (en) Frequency domain component reporting method, and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21863657

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21863657

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1